- Toate categoriile
Bun venit la Wikbeauty
Meniu principal
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Coșul tău
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compară produse ( / )
All Product collection
All Product collection
Transform Every Treatment
From fat reduction to facial rejuvenation, our professional-grade equipment is built to elevate every service on your menu, giving clients real results and your business a competitive edge.
74 produse
74 produse
Sortează după:
- Recomandat
- Cele mai relevante
- Cel mai bine vândut
- Alfabetic, A-Z
- Alfabetic, Z-A
- Preț, de la mic la mare
- Preț, de la mare la mic
- Data, de la vechi la nou
- Data, de la nou la vechi
De la $2,599.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology
The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform:
-
650 nm
-
780 nm
-
808 nm
-
940 nm
-
980 nm
This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements.
Each treatment pad contains 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode.
Key Product Advantages
Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session.
Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads.
Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation.
Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements.
International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options.
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours.
Common treatment areas include:
| Treatment area | Typical application |
|---|---|
| Abdomen | Abdominal contouring |
| Waist and flanks | Waistline definition |
| Upper and lower back | Localized body contouring |
| Upper arms | Arm-contouring treatments |
| Inner and outer thighs | Thigh shaping |
| Buttocks | Contour-focused treatments |
| Legs and calves | Localized lower-body treatments |
Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation.
How the System Works
The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol.
The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period.
The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied.
Configurable Treatment-Pad System
Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks.
Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones.
Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols.
Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase.
Vertical and Portable Options
Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary.
Recommended for:
-
Beauty studios
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Permanent treatment rooms
-
Higher-volume treatment environments
Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system.
Recommended for:
-
Independent practitioners
-
Smaller studios
-
Limited treatment spaces
-
Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation
Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort.
-
Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15
-
Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds
-
Continuous and pulsed operating modes
-
Adjustable session duration
-
Touchscreen control interface
-
Independent cooling for each pad
-
Secure pad-positioning straps
-
IC-card control system
Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5D lipo laser machine |
| Technology | Low-level diode laser |
| Laser wavelengths | 650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm |
| Diode output | Up to 209 mW per diode |
| Diodes per pad | 28 on big and 3 on a small pad |
| Standard configuration | 6 large pads and 2 small pads |
| Maximum configuration | Up to 14 treatment pads |
| Energy adjustment | Levels 1–15 |
| Pulse-time range | 0.1–5 seconds |
| Operating modes | Continuous and pulsed |
| Treatment duration | Approximately 15–60 minutes |
| Cooling system | Independent wind cooling for each pad |
| Control interface | Touchscreen |
| Additional control | IC-card system |
| Equipment options | Vertical or portable |
| Voltage options | 110 V or 220 V |
| Plug options | US, UK, EU and AU |
Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering.
Standard Package Contents
The standard package includes:
-
One 5D Lipo Laser main unit
-
Six large treatment pads
-
Two small treatment pads
-
Treatment-pad connection cables
-
Adjustable securing straps
-
Protective eyewear
-
Power cable with selected plug
-
English user manual
-
Setup and operating guidance
Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration.
Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Equipment installation
-
Basic system operation
-
Treatment-parameter selection
-
Pad positioning
-
Routine cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Recommended safety procedures
Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by:
-
Aesthetic practitioners
-
Body-contouring specialists
-
Beauty-studio owners
-
Wellness professionals
-
Trained independent operators
-
Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business
- Home Use
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active skin infections
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication
-
Other conditions identified in the operating manual
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty
Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers.
Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements.
International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug.
Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting.
Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety.
What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads.
What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas.
Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation.
How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol.
Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance.
Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used.
Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering.
Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase.
Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements.
For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order.
Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving:
-
Main machine components
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Treatment-pad connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine
Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you:
-
Identify the issue through remote technical assessment
-
Complete basic troubleshooting
-
Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required
-
Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components
Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories
-
Damage caused during unauthorized transportation
-
Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions
The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms.
Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase.
Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart
Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines.
Receives in 8 days.
De la $1,999.00
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling System
Five Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines five professional aesthetic technologies within one compact desktop platform.
Dedicated handles for 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU allow trained professionals to develop facial lifting, skin-rejuvenation, body-contouring and intimate-care services from one system.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy settings and interchangeable cartridges provide controlled operation across different treatment areas and protocols.
Five technologies | Five dedicated handles | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies in One Machine
8D HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle delivers multiple focused-ultrasound treatment lines with each activation.
It includes:
-
3.0 mm cartridge at 7 MHz
-
4.5 mm cartridge at 4 MHz
These cartridge depths support professional protocols focused on facial lifting, skin firming, jawline definition and suitable neck treatments.
The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation and up to 10,000 shots per cartridge, depending on the cartridge and operating configuration.
Liposonic Thermal Sculpting
The Liposonic handle provides deeper focused-energy delivery for appropriately selected body areas.
It includes:
-
8.0 mm cartridge
-
13.0 mm cartridge
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
Cartridge selection must be based on the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness and professional treatment protocol.
Radar Carving
The Radar Carving handle supports controlled treatments at three selectable depths:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
It can be incorporated into professional protocols focused on skin firming, facial contour refinement and selected face or neck applications.
Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines controlled needle penetration with radiofrequency energy.
It includes:
-
10-pin cartridge
-
25-pin cartridge
The needles create controlled microchannels while RF energy is delivered at the selected depth. This technology can support treatments focused on:
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Enlarged-pore appearance
-
Uneven-looking skin tone
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
General skin rejuvenation
RF microneedling is minimally invasive and requires strict hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures.
Intimate HIFU
The dedicated Intimate HIFU handle delivers focused ultrasound through a 360° treatment format.
It includes:
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
This handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted.
It must only be used by appropriately qualified professionals following consultation, informed consent, privacy, hygiene and safety requirements.
Multi-Line 8D HIFU Delivery
The 8D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation.
Compared with a conventional single-line system, this may provide:
-
More efficient treatment-area coverage
-
More consistent line placement
-
Reduced repetitive repositioning
-
Streamlined facial treatment workflows
-
Greater coverage across appropriate areas
“8D” is the commercial name of the treatment platform. It should not be interpreted as meaning the handle delivers exactly eight lines.
Multi-line delivery does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection or professional knowledge of facial anatomy.
Treatment Handles and Cartridge Depths
| Technology | Included cartridges | Primary application |
|---|---|---|
| 8D HIFU | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Facial lifting and skin firming |
| Liposonic | 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm | Professional body contouring |
| Radar Carving | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Contour refinement and firming |
| Gold RF Microneedling | 10-pin and 25-pin | Skin-texture and rejuvenation protocols |
| Intimate HIFU | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Specialized intimate-care treatments |
The correct handle, cartridge and parameters must be selected according to the treatment area, client suitability and professional protocol.
Professional Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
| Treatment category | Common areas | Applicable technology |
|---|---|---|
| Facial lifting | Face and lower face | 8D HIFU |
| Jawline definition | Jawline and submental area | 8D HIFU or Radar Carving |
| Neck firming | Suitable neck areas | 8D HIFU or Radar Carving |
| Skin rejuvenation | Face and selected body areas | Gold RF Microneedling |
| Body contouring | Abdomen, waist, back and thighs | Liposonic |
| Contour refinement | Selected facial and body areas | Radar Carving |
| Intimate care | Intimate treatment area | Intimate HIFU |
Individual results vary according to client condition, tissue depth, treatment settings, treatment frequency and biological response.
How the Technologies Work
Focused Ultrasound
The 8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving and Intimate HIFU handles deliver focused energy to a selected depth below the surface.
When applied correctly, the controlled focal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes.
Radiofrequency Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle uses fine needles to deliver radiofrequency energy at a controlled depth.
This produces a targeted treatment response designed to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture.
RF microneedling is not a laser treatment and does not rely on light energy.
Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
Use the 8D HIFU handle for professional face, jawline and suitable neck protocols.
Skin-Rejuvenation Treatments
The Gold RF Microneedling handle adds targeted services focused on texture, pores, fine lines and scar appearance.
Body-Contouring Services
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges support treatments for appropriately selected body areas.
Contour-Refinement Treatments
The Radar Carving handle provides three depth options for focused facial and body protocols.
Intimate Wellness Services
The Intimate HIFU handle enables qualified providers to add specialized services where permitted within their professional scope.
Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may develop plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, compatibility and intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols.
Compact Professional Desktop Design
The system combines five treatment technologies in a desktop housing measuring approximately 58 × 44 × 44 cm.
Key operating features include:
-
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
-
Five dedicated treatment handles
-
Pre-programmed treatment modes
-
Adjustable energy from 0.1–3.0 J
-
Temperature monitoring
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Adjustable operating limits
-
AC 110–240 V compatibility
-
Approximately 19 kg net weight
The machine should be installed on a stable treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, tissue condition and contraindications.
Intimate treatments require additional privacy, informed-consent and professional-scope procedures.
2. Handle Selection
The appropriate handle is selected according to whether the treatment focuses on lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring or intimate care.
3. Cartridge Selection
The operator installs the cartridge or microneedling tip appropriate for the treatment area.
4. Treatment Preparation
The area is cleansed and prepared. Conductive gel or another approved coupling material is applied where required.
Sterile preparation and single-use needle cartridges are required for RF microneedling.
5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other settings are selected according to the approved protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct placement and technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives technology-specific aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or pinpoint crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies between treatments and clients.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling system |
| Machine design | Black desktop housing |
| Control interface | 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen |
| Treatment handles | Five dedicated handles |
| Included technologies | 8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU |
| 8D HIFU cartridges | 3.0 mm at 7 MHz and 4.5 mm at 4 MHz |
| Liposonic cartridges | 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm |
| Radar Carving cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Intimate HIFU cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| RF Microneedling tips | 10-pin and 25-pin |
| Adjustable energy | 0.1–3.0 J |
| Multi-line output | Up to 12 lines per activation |
| Cartridge capacity | Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge |
| Intimate probe focal thermal setting | Manufacturer-stated 60–70°C focal range |
| Rated voltage | AC 110–240 V |
| Machine dimensions | 58 × 44 × 44 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 19 kg |
| Safety features | Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and adjustable operating limits |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor |
The stated 60–70°C figure refers to the manufacturer-specified focal thermal setting. It must not be interpreted as a safe surface temperature or used without the supplied professional protocol.
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One 5-in-1 desktop touchscreen console
-
One 8D HIFU handle
-
One Liposonic Thermal Sculpting handle
-
One Radar Carving handle
-
One Gold RF Microneedling handle
-
One Intimate HIFU handle
-
Universal power cable
-
Starter conductive gel
8D HIFU Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Liposonic Cartridges
-
8.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
Radar Carving Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Intimate HIFU Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
RF Microneedling Tips
-
10-pin
-
25-pin
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
8D HIFU operation
-
Liposonic operation
-
Radar Carving operation
-
RF Microneedling operation
-
Intimate HIFU operation
-
Handle and cartridge installation
-
Basic treatment-parameter selection
-
Hygiene and infection-control procedures
-
Facial, body and intimate-care protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training supports equipment familiarization but does not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Temperature-monitoring system
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original components
-
Eligible repair labor during the warranty period
Cartridges, microneedling tips and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge or tip depletion
-
Reuse of single-use microneedling tips
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Use of medication affecting healing or bleeding
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling requires appropriate disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle cartridges must not be reused.
Intimate HIFU Safety
Intimate treatments require specialist training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls.
Operators must confirm that intimate treatments are permitted within their professional scope and local regulations. Incorrect depth, temperature or placement can cause tissue injury.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified intimate-care providers
-
Appropriately trained independent practitioners
The machine is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This 5-in-1 System?
Five Dedicated Treatment Technologies
Provide professional facial lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring and intimate-care services from one platform.
Efficient Multi-Line HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for efficient area coverage.
Professional RF Microneedling
The 10-pin and 25-pin tips support precise, depth-controlled skin-rejuvenation protocols.
Face and Body Depth Options
Cartridges range from 1.5 mm for superficial protocols to 13.0 mm for deeper body applications.
Compact Desktop Format
Five treatment technologies are integrated within a system weighing approximately 19 kg.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “5-in-1” mean?
The system combines 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU. Each technology has a dedicated handle.
How is 8D HIFU different from conventional HIFU?
The 8D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation, providing more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line system.
Does “8D” mean eight treatment lines?
No. “8D” is the commercial name of the system. The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation.
Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate hygiene and post-treatment care are required.
What is Radar Carving used for?
The Radar Carving handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for professional firming and contour-refinement protocols.
What is the Liposonic handle used for?
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges are intended for body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery varies by technology. RF microneedling may produce temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary sensitivity, tenderness or swelling.
How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed result should not be promised.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, tips, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines:
-
8D HIFU
-
Liposonic Thermal Sculpting
-
Radar Carving
-
Gold RF Microneedling
-
Intimate HIFU
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$1,499.00
Professional 12D Focused Ultrasound System
Seven Cartridge Depths for Facial Firming and Body-Contouring Applications
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT is a professional focused-ultrasound system with three treatment handles and seven interchangeable cartridge depths.
Four facial cartridges—1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm—support professionally planned facial and neck treatments. Three deeper cartridges—6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm—are intended for appropriately selected body areas.
Single and multi-line operating modes provide flexibility for targeted energy placement and broader treatment-area coverage.
Three treatment handles | Seven cartridge depths | 10,000 shots per cartridge | Three-year warranty
Separate Facial and Body Cartridge Systems
The seven cartridges must be divided clearly between facial and body applications.
Facial Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Body Cartridges
-
6.0 mm
-
9.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges should not be marketed for facial treatment. These depths are intended for body areas with sufficient tissue thickness.
A 13.0 mm cartridge must never be used on the face.
Four Facial Treatment Depths
1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Applications
The 1.5 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 5.5 MHz and is intended for suitable superficial facial areas.
Potential professional applications include:
-
Superficial skin-firming protocols
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Skin-texture refinement
-
Suitable areas of the forehead and cheeks
2.0 mm — Precision Facial Applications
The 2.0 mm cartridge also uses a supplied frequency of 5.5 MHz.
It may support precise treatment of appropriately selected facial areas, including suitable tissue around—but never directly over—the eyes.
Operators must understand orbital anatomy and follow all prohibited treatment zones.
3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Facial Applications
The 3.0 mm cartridge is intended for controlled treatment within suitable facial and neck tissue.
Potential applications include:
-
Facial skin firming
-
Cheek treatments
-
Lower-face contour refinement
-
Suitable neck areas
-
Collagen-remodeling protocols
4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Applications
The 4.5 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 4 MHz and is intended for appropriately selected deeper facial areas.
Potential professional applications include:
-
Lower-face firming
-
Jawline definition
-
Submental-area protocols
-
Suitable neck treatments
Three Body Treatment Depths
6.0 mm — Shallow Body Applications
The 6.0 mm cartridge is intended for selected body areas with sufficient tissue depth.
It is not a pore-refinement cartridge and should not be used as a superficial facial option.
9.0 mm — Medium-Depth Body Applications
The 9.0 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 2 MHz and is intended for professional body protocols.
Potential areas may include:
-
Abdomen
-
Flanks
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Other approved body areas
13.0 mm — Deeper Body Applications
The 13.0 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 2 MHz and is intended only for body areas with appropriate tissue thickness.
Incorrect use on thin tissue or facial areas could expose nerves, blood vessels, muscles or other structures to unintended thermal or mechanical injury.
Three Professional Treatment Handles
5.5 MHz Handle
Designed for the 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm cartridges used in suitable superficial and precision facial protocols.
4 MHz Handle
Designed for the 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges used in mid-depth and deeper facial applications.
2 MHz Handle
Designed for the 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges used in approved body protocols.
Handle and cartridge compatibility should always follow the supplied user manual.
Single and Multi-Line Operating Modes
Single Mode
Single mode supports controlled placement in targeted treatment areas.
It may be useful for:
-
Smaller facial zones
-
Detailed contour planning
-
Areas requiring careful line placement
-
Customized professional protocols
Multi-Line Mode
Multi-line mode supports broader treatment-area coverage and more efficient line delivery.
It may be useful for:
-
Larger facial areas
-
Body-treatment zones
-
Structured full-area protocols
-
Clinics requiring efficient treatment workflows
Multi-line delivery does not make the treatment hands-free. The operator must actively position and monitor the handpiece throughout treatment.
How Focused Ultrasound Works
The system delivers ultrasound energy to a defined focal depth beneath the skin’s surface.
At the focal point, the energy creates controlled thermal and mechanical effects within the targeted tissue. This response may support gradual tissue remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin firmness.
Focused ultrasound does not provide a surgical facelift and should not be marketed as permanently changing facial anatomy.
Individual outcomes vary according to:
-
Client age
-
Skin condition
-
Tissue thickness
-
Treatment area
-
Cartridge depth
-
Acoustic output
-
Line placement
-
Individual biological response
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Suitable cartridges | Common areas |
|---|---|---|
| Superficial facial firming | 1.5 mm | Suitable forehead and cheek areas |
| Precision facial treatment | 2.0 mm | Appropriate facial areas |
| Facial contour refinement | 3.0 mm | Cheeks, lower face and neck |
| Deeper facial firming | 4.5 mm | Jawline, submental area and suitable neck areas |
| Shallow body treatment | 6.0 mm | Approved body areas |
| Medium-depth body treatment | 9.0 mm | Abdomen, arms, flanks and thighs |
| Deeper body treatment | 13.0 mm | Areas with sufficient tissue thickness |
The treatment area must be assessed before selecting a cartridge. A deeper cartridge is not automatically more effective.
Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The HIFU 12D should not be advertised as providing:
-
Guaranteed immediate lifting
-
A surgical-facelift result
-
Permanent wrinkle removal
-
Permanent pore reduction
-
Muscle tightening or muscle building
-
Guaranteed collagen regeneration
-
Zero risk of thermal damage
-
Pain-free treatment for every client
-
Zero downtime
-
Safety for every skin type or medical condition
-
Guaranteed body tightening after weight loss
-
Fixed results within 2–4 week
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, previous aesthetic treatments, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications.
2. Treatment Mapping
Suitable treatment zones and prohibited areas are identified and marked.
3. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The operator chooses the correct facial or body handle and cartridge depth.
4. Skin Preparation
The area is cleansed, and an appropriate ultrasound coupling gel is applied to maintain complete contact.
5. Parameter Selection
Energy, line spacing, mode and treatment pattern are selected according to the area and professional protocol.
6. Test Delivery
Where specified by the protocol, a test line or low-energy application is performed to assess comfort and tissue response.
7. Controlled Treatment
The operator maintains full contact and actively controls handpiece placement throughout the session.
8. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and the client receives suitable aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling, numbness or discomfort may occur.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT |
| Product type | Professional focused-ultrasound aesthetic system |
| Technology | Manufacturer-described micro-pulse focused ultrasound |
| Treatment handles | Three |
| Total cartridge depths | Seven |
| Facial cartridges | 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Body cartridges | 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm |
| Supplied frequencies | 2 MHz, 4 MHz and 5.5 MHz |
| Cartridge capacity | Up to 20,000 shots per cartridge |
| Operating modes | Single and multi-line |
| Application format | Professional desktop system |
| Input voltage | AC 110–240 V |
| Treatment areas | Face, suitable neck areas and approved body areas |
| Warranty | Three-year limited professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and remote technical assistance |
“12D” is the commercial model name. It should not be interpreted as twelve treatment dimensions, depths or clinically proven advantages.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One HIFU 12D New Gold TT control system
-
Three professional treatment handles
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Starter ultrasound coupling gel
-
Required handle-connection accessories
Facial Cartridges
-
One 1.5 mm cartridge
-
One 2.0 mm cartridge
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
Body Cartridges
-
One 6.0 mm cartridge
-
One 9.0 mm cartridge
-
One 13.0 mm cartridge
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Handle and cartridge training
-
Facial treatment guidance
-
Body-treatment guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
Machine installation
-
Handle identification
-
Facial and body cartridge selection
-
Cartridge installation
-
Single and multi-line modes
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Prohibited anatomical zones
-
Basic parameter selection
-
Coupling-gel application
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional anatomy education, aesthetic qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Display and control interface
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Incorrect cartridge installation
-
Operation without sufficient coupling gel
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the user manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
The HIFU 12D is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active electronic implants
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Open wounds or active infection
-
Severe skin disease in the treatment area
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Facial implants or threads
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
Prohibited Treatment Areas
Focused ultrasound must not be applied directly over:
-
Eyes or eyelids
-
Thyroid
-
Major nerves
-
Large blood vessels
-
Bone surfaces
-
Trachea
-
Breast tissue
-
Genitals
-
Other areas prohibited by the device instructions
Body-Cartridge Safety
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges must not be used on facial areas.
Using an excessively deep cartridge can cause unintended thermal or mechanical injury.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The HIFU 12D system is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Professional body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose HIFU 12D New Gold TT?
Seven Clearly Defined Depths
Four facial cartridges and three body cartridges support a broad range of professional applications.
Three Frequency-Specific Handles
The 5.5 MHz, 4 MHz and 2 MHz handles support different compatible cartridge groups.
Single and Multi-Line Modes
Choose targeted delivery or broader treatment-area coverage according to the professional protocol.
High Cartridge Capacity
Each cartridge provides up to 10,000 shots according to the supplied specification.
Universal Voltage
AC 110–240 V compatibility supports international installation.
Professional Training
Remote setup, operating guidance and a training certificate are included.
Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited professional warranty and remote technical assistance.
Frequently Asked Questions
What makes this a “12D” HIFU machine?
“12D” is the commercial model name. The system’s measurable features are three handles, seven cartridge depths and single or multi-line operation.
Are all seven cartridges intended for the face?
No. Only the 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges are facial options. The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are for appropriate body areas
What is the difference between the three handles?
The 5.5 MHz handle supports shallower facial cartridges, the 4 MHz handle supports mid-depth and deeper facial cartridges, and the 2 MHz handle supports body cartridges.
Can the system treat around the eyes?
Only suitable areas around the eyes may be treated by a properly trained operator using the correct cartridge and protocol. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid.
Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early change in firmness. Tissue-remodeling responses may develop progressively, and results vary between individuals.
Is treatment painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Clients may experience warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort.
Is there any downtime?
Some clients resume normal activities shortly afterward, but temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur.
How long does treatment take?
Treatment time depends on the area, mode, number of lines and professional protocol. A universal 20–30-minute duration should not be promised.
Can the operator leave during treatment?
No. Focused-ultrasound treatment is not hands-free. The operator must actively control and monitor handpiece placement.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridge depletion, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
Expand Your Professional Face and Body Services
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT combines:
-
Four facial cartridge depths
-
Three body cartridge depths
-
Three frequency-specific handles
-
Single and multi-line operation
-
Up to 10,000 shots per cartridge
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$2,299.00
Sistem profesional de cavitație 80K și Vacuum RF 10-în-1
Remodelare corporală cu tehnologii multiple și un kit complet de tratament
Aparatul de cavitație 80K Vacuum RF 10-în-1 este o platformă multifuncțională de remodelare corporală, dezvoltată pentru saloane de înfrumusețare, spa-uri medicale, clinici estetice și studiouri profesionale de sculptare corporală.
Sistemul combină cavitația ultrasonică 80K, Vacuum RF, RF multipolar, plăci lipolaser și masaj vibrator cu Inner Ball Roller. Setul complet de accesorii include șapte mânere profesionale, cinci capete de masaj, opt plăci lipolaser și 29 de cupe de vacuum.
Tehnologiile multiple și dimensiunile variate ale aplicatoarelor permit practicienilor instruiți să creeze programe personalizate pentru abdomen, talie, coapse, partea superioară a brațelor, spate, șolduri, picioare și zone adecvate ale feței și gâtului.
Zece funcții de tratament | Cavitație 80K | 29 de cupe de vacuum | Garanție de trei ani
Cinci tehnologii de bază pe o singură platformă profesională
Cavitație ultrasonică 80K
Mânerul de cavitație 80K furnizează energie ultrasonică în zone corporale adecvate, pentru programe profesionale neinvazive de rafinare a conturului.
Aplicațiile obișnuite includ:
-
Tratamente pentru abdomen
-
Programe pentru talie și flancuri
-
Tratamente pentru coapse
-
Programe pentru partea superioară a brațelor
-
Tratamente pentru șolduri și spate
-
Servicii generale de remodelare corporală
Terapie Vacuum RF
Funcția Vacuum RF combină aspirația controlată cu energia de radiofrecvență.
Aplicațiile obișnuite includ:
-
Programe pentru aspectul celulitei
-
Susținerea fermității pielii
-
Îngrijire corporală axată pe îmbunătățirea circulației
-
Masaj cu vacuum
-
Îmbunătățirea conturului corporal
-
Tratamente estetice generale
RF multipolar
RF multipolar furnizează energie termică controlată pentru programe profesionale de tonifiere a pielii și rafinare a texturii.
Aplicațiile obișnuite includ:
-
Piele cu aspect flasc al corpului
-
Susținerea fermității pielii
-
Programe pentru îmbunătățirea texturii pielii
-
Tratamente pentru abdomen și coapse
-
Protocoale faciale adecvate
-
Servicii generale de rejuvenare
Plăci lipolaser
Opt plăci lipolaser susțin programe de remodelare corporală pentru mai multe zone, planificate profesional.
Aplicațiile obișnuite includ:
-
Abdomen
-
Talie și flancuri
-
Coapse
-
Brațe superioare
-
Spate și șolduri
-
Tratamente simultane pentru mai multe zone
Masaj cu Inner Ball Roller
Inner Ball Roller oferă masaj mecanic controlat și vibrații în zonele selectate ale corpului.
Aplicațiile obișnuite includ:
-
Masaj axat pe îmbunătățirea circulației
-
Susținerea temporară în cazul retenției de apă
-
Programe pentru aspectul celulitei
-
Relaxarea mușchilor
-
Masaj post-tratament
-
Stare generală de bine a corpului
Tehnologia potrivită, aplicatorul, setarea energiei, nivelul de vacuum și durata ședinței trebuie selectate în funcție de zona tratată, starea clientului și protocolul profesional.
Selectați programul de tratament potrivit pentru fiecare client
Sistemul permite planuri personalizate de remodelare corporală, folosind una sau mai multe tehnologii de tratament.
Programul 1: Conturarea abdomenului și taliei
Un program axat pe remodelarea corporală, destinat zonelor localizate adecvate din jurul abdomenului și taliei.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
Cavitație de 80K
-
RF cu vacuum
-
RF multipolar
-
Plăci lipolaser
-
Rolă cu bilă interioară
Recomandat pentru:
-
Tratamente pentru abdomen
-
Rafinarea conturului taliei
-
Programe pentru flancuri
-
Servicii profesionale de remodelare corporală
Programul 2: Coapse și aspectul celulitei
Un program pentru partea inferioară a corpului, conceput pentru problemele adecvate ale coapselor interioare și exterioare.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
RF cu vacuum
-
RF multipolar
-
Rolă cu bilă interioară
-
Cavitație de 80K
-
Plăci lipolaser
Recomandat pentru:
-
Coapse interioare
-
Coapse exterioare
-
Programe pentru aspectul celulitei
-
Conturarea părții inferioare a corpului
Programul 3: Brațe, spate și șolduri
Un program personalizabil pentru zone corporale mai mici sau conturate.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
Mâner de cavitație potrivit
-
Ventuze de vacuum
-
RF multipolar
-
Plăci lipolaser
-
Masaj cu rolă
Recomandat pentru:
-
Brațe superioare
-
Partea superioară și inferioară a spatelui
-
Zone de sub linia sutienului
-
Șolduri și flancuri
Programul 4: Fermitatea feței și gâtului
Un program profesional mai delicat, care utilizează doar aplicatoare și setări aprobate pentru zonele feței și gâtului.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
Mâner RF mic potrivit
-
Cupe de vacuum adecvate
-
Masaj delicat cu rolă
-
Setări personalizate de intensitate redusă
Recomandat pentru:
-
Îmbunătățirea conturului feței
-
Tratamente pentru linia mandibulară
-
Zone adecvate ale gâtului
-
Servicii profesionale pentru fermitatea pielii
Set complet de accesorii pentru tratamente personalizate
Aparatul include mai multe mânere, capete, plăci și cupe pentru diferite zone de tratament.
| Categorie accesoriu | Cantitate | Aplicație recomandată |
|---|---|---|
| Mânere profesionale pentru tratament | 7 | Cavitație, RF, RF cu vacuum, rolă și funcții suplimentare |
| Capete de masaj | 5 | Masaj mecanic personalizat |
| Plăci lipolaser | 8 | Programe corporale simultane pentru mai multe zone |
| Ventuze de vacuum | 29 | Diferite zone ale corpului, feței și gâtului |
| Rolă cu bilă interioară | 1 sistem | Îngrijire corporală axată pe masaj și circulație |
Gama de aplicatoare le permite operatorilor instruiți să selecteze o dimensiune și o formă potrivite pentru fiecare zonă de tratament.
Clienții noi ar trebui să înceapă cu setări prudente pentru energie, vacuum și temperatură, înainte ca intensitatea să fie crescută treptat.
Zone de tratament ajustabile
Sistemul permite tratamente profesionale în mai multe zone ale corpului și feței.
Tratamente pentru partea superioară a corpului
-
Brațe superioare
-
Partea superioară a spatelui
-
Partea inferioară a spatelui
-
Zone de sub linia sutienului
-
Talie
-
Flancuri
Tratamente pentru partea inferioară a corpului
-
Abdomen
-
Șolduri
-
Fese
-
Coapse interioare
-
Coapse exterioare
-
Picioare
Tratamente pentru față și gât
-
Zone adecvate ale obrajilor
-
Linia mandibulară
-
Partea inferioară a feței
-
Zone adecvate ale gâtului
-
Alte zone ale feței evaluate profesional
Aplicații profesionale pentru corp și față
Tratamentele disponibile depind de tehnologia, mânerul, cupa, placa, setarea energiei și protocolul profesional selectate.
| Zonă de tratament | Tehnologie aplicabilă | Aplicație estetică prevăzută |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Cavitație, RF și lipolaser | Îmbunătățirea conturului corporal |
| Talie și flancuri | Cavitație și RF cu vacuum | Suport pentru conturarea taliei |
| Coapse | RF cu vacuum și rolă | Îngrijire pentru aspectul celulitei și textură |
| Brațe superioare | Cavitație, RF sau lipolaser | Programe țintite pentru îngrijirea corpului |
| Spate | RF cu vacuum și lipolaser | Îmbunătățirea localizată a conturului |
| Șolduri și fese | RF și rolă | Suport pentru fermitate și textură |
| Față și linia mandibulară | Aplicatoare RF și cu vacuum potrivite | Programe pentru conturul feței |
| Gât | Mâner RF potrivit | Suport profesional pentru fermitate |
Indicațiile tratamentului și rezultatele așteptate diferă de la un client la altul. Înaintea fiecărui tratament trebuie efectuată o consultație completă.
Cum se desfășoară o ședință profesională de tratament
1. Consultația clientului
Practicianul analizează istoricul medical al clientului, obiectivele tratamentului, compoziția corporală, zonele vizate și contraindicațiile.
2. Selectarea tehnologiei și a aplicatorului
Aplicatoarele de tratament, capetele de masaj, ventuzele de vacuum și plăcile lipolaser adecvate sunt selectate în funcție de planul de tratament.
3. Selectarea parametrilor
Practicianul selectează energia cavitației, nivelul RF, presiunea vacuumului, intensitatea masajului și durata ședinței în funcție de toleranța clientului și de protocolul profesional.
4. Tratament cu tehnologii multiple
Tehnologiile selectate sunt aplicate în secvența corespunzătoare. O ședință profesională completă durează, în general, aproximativ 60–90 de minute.
5. Recomandări post-tratament
După tratament, zonele sunt evaluate, iar clientul primește recomandări adecvate privind hidratarea, activitatea și îngrijirea ulterioară.
Pot apărea roșeață temporară, senzație de căldură, sensibilitate, vânătăi, furnicături sau hipersensibilitate, în special după tratamentele cu vacuum.
Conceput pentru medii profesionale de tratament
Aparatul combină mai multe tehnologii de remodelare cu un kit extins de accesorii pentru o utilizare profesională simplificată.
Printre principalele avantaje operaționale se numără:
-
Zece funcții de tratament integrate
-
Cavitație ultrasonică de 80K
-
RF cu vacuum și RF multipolar
-
Opt plăci de lipolaser
-
Masaj cu role cu bile interioare
-
Șapte aplicatoare profesionale
-
Cinci capete de masaj
-
Douăzeci și nouă de cupe de vacuum
Specificații tehnice
| Specificații | Detalii |
|---|---|
| Denumirea produsului | Aparat de cavitație cu vacuum RF 80K 10-în-1 |
| Tipul produsului | Sistem profesional multifuncțional pentru remodelarea corporală |
| Tehnologii principale | Cavitație 80K, vacuum RF, RF multipolar, lipolaser și masaj cu role |
| Frecvența cavitației | 80 KHz |
| Aplicatoare de tratament | Șapte |
| Capete de masaj | Cinci |
| Plăci lipolaser | Opt |
| Ventuze de vacuum | Douăzeci și nouă |
| Durata tratamentului | Aproximativ 60–90 de minute |
| Zone de tratament | Abdomen, talie, coapse, brațe, spate, șolduri, picioare, față și gât |
| Interfață de control | Panou de control profesional cu ecran tactil sau digital |
| Alimentare | 110 V și 220 V |
| Design | Sistem profesional cu cărucior pe roți |
| Funcții de siguranță | Oprire automată, monitorizarea temperaturii, protecție la suprasarcină și intensitate reglabilă |
| Garanție | Garanție de trei ani pentru componente |
| Asistență | Instruire profesională și asistență pentru clienți |
| Certificate | Certificate CE și ISO |
Ce este inclus?
Pachetul include sistemul principal de control și o selecție completă de accesorii profesionale pentru tratament.
Echipament standard
-
O unitate principală de cavitație cu vacuum RF 10-în-1
-
Șapte aplicatoare profesionale de tratament
-
Un aplicator de cavitație 80K
-
Componente pentru tratament RF cu vacuum
-
Mânere RF multipolare
-
Mâner cu role și bile interioare
-
Cinci capete de masaj
-
Opt plăci de lipolaser
-
Douăzeci și nouă de cupe de vacuum
-
Componente de conectare pentru mâner și cupă
-
Cabluri și accesorii Lipolaser
-
Cablu de alimentare
-
Manual de utilizare în limba engleză
-
Îndrumări de utilizare
Documentație și instruire
-
Manual de utilizare în limba engleză
-
Instruire profesională la distanță
-
Îndrumări pentru instalarea aparatului
-
Configurarea mânerelor pentru tratament
-
Utilizarea cavitației
-
Selectarea parametrilor RF
-
Selectarea cupelor de vacuum
-
Poziționarea plăcilor Lipolaser
-
Utilizarea mânerului cu role și bile interioare
-
Protocoale pentru tratamente corporale și faciale
-
Instrucțiuni privind siguranța și contraindicațiile
-
Îndrumări privind curățarea și întreținerea
-
Asistență pentru depanare de bază
-
Certificat de instruire după finalizare
Instruire profesională și asistență continuă
Instruirea profesională acoperă:
-
Instalarea și configurarea aparatului
-
Utilizarea interfeței de control
-
Instalarea tuturor mânerelor pentru tratament
-
Utilizarea cavitației 80K
-
Reglarea energiei RF
-
Selectarea presiunii de vacuum
-
Selectarea celor 29 de cupe de vacuum
-
Poziționarea plăcilor Lipolaser
-
Utilizarea mânerului cu role și bile interioare
-
Succesiunea tratamentelor cu tehnologii multiple
-
Consultarea clientului
-
Curățare și întreținere de rutină
-
Proceduri de siguranță
-
Depanare de bază
Un certificat de instruire profesională este oferit după finalizarea cu succes.
Garanție de trei ani
Aparatul de cavitație, vacuum și RF 80K 10-în-1 beneficiază de o garanție de trei ani pentru piese, oferind protecție pe termen lung pentru investiția dumneavoastră în echipament.
Acoperirea garanției
Sub rezerva condițiilor oficiale de garanție, defectele de fabricație eligibile care implică următoarele componente pot fi acoperite:
-
Unitatea principală a aparatului
-
Componente electronice interne
-
Interfață de control digitală
-
Componente pentru generarea cavitației
-
Componente RF și de vacuum
-
Mânere originale pentru tratament
-
Plăci Lipolaser
-
Conexiunile mânerelor și cablurilor
-
Alte piese eligibile furnizate împreună cu aparatul
Procesul de asistență tehnică
Dacă apare o problemă tehnică, echipa de asistență va oferi ajutor pentru:
-
Inspecție la distanță și identificarea defecțiunii
-
Depanare ghidată
-
Confirmarea componentei afectate
-
Verificarea eligibilității pentru garanție
-
Asistență pentru piesele de schimb acoperite
-
Instrucțiuni de instalare pentru piesele de schimb eligibile
Excluderi din garanție
Garanția nu acoperă în mod normal:
-
Deteriorări accidentale sau cosmetice
-
Deteriorări cauzate de utilizarea necorespunzătoare
-
Utilizarea incorectă a mânerului, cupei sau plăcii
-
Reparații sau modificări neautorizate
-
Tensiune sau conexiune electrică incorectă
-
Curățare, depozitare sau întreținere necorespunzătoare
-
Uzura normală a cupelor, membranelor și consumabilelor
-
Deteriorări cauzate de nerespectarea manualului de utilizare
-
Expediere sau transport organizat fără autorizație
Detaliile comenzii originale, numărul de serie al aparatului, imaginile și videoclipurile de diagnosticare pot fi necesare la solicitarea service-ului.
Acoperirea completă rămâne supusă politicii oficiale de garanție.
Siguranță și contraindicații
Acest sistem constă în echipament profesional pentru cavitație, RF, vacuum și lipolaser și trebuie operat numai de personal instruit corespunzător.
Înainte de tratament trebuie efectuate o evaluare completă a stării de sănătate și o verificare a contraindicațiilor.
Tratamentul poate să nu fie potrivit pentru persoanele cu:
-
Sarcină sau suspiciune de sarcină
-
Stimulatoare cardiace sau dispozitive electronice implantate
-
Implanturi metalice în zona tratată sau în apropierea acesteia
-
Cancer activ
-
Cheaguri de sânge active sau suspectate
-
Afecțiuni cardiovasculare severe
-
Varice severe
-
Răni deschise sau infecții cutanate active
-
Afecțiuni hepatice sau renale severe
-
Diabet necontrolat
-
Tulburări de coagulare
-
Intervenție chirurgicală recentă
-
Sensibilitate redusă
-
Afecțiuni medicale necontrolate
-
Alte contraindicații enumerate în manualul de utilizare
Cavitația nu trebuie aplicată pe cap, inimă, sâni, rinichi, ficat, organe reproducătoare, suprafețe osoase sau alte zone interzise.
Setările RF, ale vacuumului și ale lipolaserului trebuie ajustate în funcție de zona tratată, starea pielii și toleranța clientului.
Aceasta nu este o listă exhaustivă de contraindicații. Operatorii trebuie să urmeze manualul de utilizare, standardele profesionale aplicabile și reglementările locale. Trebuie solicitat sfatul medical ori de câte ori există incertitudini privind eligibilitatea clientului.
Utilizatori profesioniști vizați
Acest sistem este potrivit pentru:
-
Saloane de înfrumusețare
-
Spa-uri profesionale
-
Clinici de estetică
-
Centre medicale spa
-
Studiouri de remodelare corporală
-
Centre de wellness
-
Practicieni independenți instruiți
-
Profesioniști calificați în estetică
-
Afaceri care își extind serviciile de remodelare corporală
Acest aparat nu este destinat utilizării casnice necalificate sau ocazionale.
De ce să alegeți aparatul de cavitație cu vacuum RF 10-în-1, 80K?
Combinați mai multe tehnologii
Sistemul combină cavitația, RF cu vacuum, RF multipolar, lipolaserul și masajul cu role Inner Ball într-o singură platformă profesională.
Accesați un kit complet de tratament
Șapte mânere, cinci capete de masaj, opt plăci de lipolaser și 29 de cupe de vacuum susțin o gamă largă de protocoale profesionale.
Tratați mai multe zone ale corpului
Sistemul permite tratamente pentru abdomen, talie, coapse, brațe, spate, șolduri, picioare și zone adecvate ale feței și gâtului.
Personalizați fiecare ședință
Tehnologiile multiple, dimensiunile aplicatoarelor și setările ajustabile permit adaptarea tratamentelor la starea clientului și la obiectivele profesionale.
Protejați-vă investiția
Sistemul include o garanție de trei ani pentru componente, certificate CE și ISO, instruire profesională și asistență pentru clienți.
Întrebări frecvente
Ce tehnologii sunt incluse?
Sistemul combină cavitația ultrasonică 80K, RF cu vacuum, RF multipolar, plăci de lipolaser, masajul cu role Inner Ball și funcții suplimentare de tratament integrate.
Ce este cavitația 80K?
Mânerul de cavitație 80K furnizează energie ultrasonică pentru programe profesionale de remodelare corporală, destinate unor zone localizate potrivite.
De ce sunt incluse 29 de cupe pentru vacuum?
Diferite zone ale corpului și feței necesită dimensiuni și forme diferite ale cupelor. Selecția permite practicienilor să aleagă cupa potrivită pentru fiecare zonă de tratament.
Câte plăci de lipolaser sunt incluse?
Sistemul include opt plăci de lipolaser pentru tratamente profesionale planificate pe mai multe zone.
Ce zone ale corpului pot fi tratate?
Zonele potrivite includ abdomenul, talia, flancurile, coapsele, partea superioară a brațelor, spatele, șoldurile, fesele, picioarele și anumite zone ale feței sau gâtului.
Cât durează un tratament?
O ședință completă cu tehnologii multiple durează, în general, aproximativ 60-90 de minute. Durata depinde de numărul de zone și de tehnologiile selectate.
Câte ședințe sunt recomandate?
Planul de tratament trebuie personalizat în funcție de starea și obiectivele clientului. Programele profesionale includ de obicei mai multe ședințe, la intervale adecvate.
Tratamentul este inconfortabil?
Senzațiile clientului variază în funcție de tehnologie. Cavitația poate produce un sunet audibil, RF creează căldură, vacuumul produce sucțiune, iar mânerul cu role oferă masaj mecanic.
Există timp de recuperare?
Mulți clienți eligibili își pot relua activitățile normale la scurt timp după tratament. Pot apărea temporar roșeață, senzație de căldură, vânătăi, sensibilitate sau durere la atingere.
Este inclusă instruirea profesională?
Instruirea profesională acoperă toate mânerele de tratament, cupele pentru vacuum, plăcile de lipolaser, succesiunea tehnologiilor, siguranța, curățarea și întreținerea. Se oferă un certificat de instruire.
Ce acoperă garanția de trei ani?
Garanția de trei ani pentru componente acoperă defectele de fabricație eligibile care afectează componentele aprobate ale aparatului, în conformitate cu politica oficială de garanție. Consumabilele, daunele accidentale, utilizarea necorespunzătoare și modificările neautorizate sunt excluse.
Aparatul include certificatele CE și ISO?
Certificatele CE și ISO sunt incluse.
Adaugă remodelarea corporală cu tehnologii multiple afacerii tale
Aparatul de cavitație cu vacuum și RF 80K 10-în-1 combină:
-
Cavitație ultrasonică de 80K
-
RF cu vacuum și RF multipolar
-
Opt plăci de lipolaser
-
Șapte mânere, cinci capete de masaj și 29 de cupe pentru vacuum
-
Garanție de trei ani pentru componente și asistență profesională
Contactează Wikbeauty pentru a comanda aparatul sau pentru a primi mai multe informații despre tehnologiile, accesoriile și instruirea profesională oferite.
Comandă aparatul de cavitație cu vacuum și RF 10-în-1 și solicită prețul
Receives in 8 days.
Answer a few quick questions and we'll recommend the right Lipo Laser setup for you.
Professional Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System
Twelve Programs and Six Specialized Tips for Customized Skin Care
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is a professional facial platform developed for premium skin-care studios, medical spas, dermatology clinics and luxury beauty centers.
The system combines water-based hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support. Twelve customizable treatment programs and six interchangeable tips allow practitioners to create personalized protocols for different skin concerns.
Its gesture-control functionality, premium glass components, adjustable treatment settings and compatible booster solutions support efficient professional operation and a premium client experience.
Hydrodermabrasion | Twelve treatment programs | Six specialized tips | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Elite Facial Platform
Hydrodermabrasion
The Hydrodermabrasion function combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation for professional cleansing and hydration.
Common applications include:
-
Deep facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Skin hydration
-
Pore-care programs
-
Removal of loosened debris
-
General facial rejuvenation
Booster Serum Infusion
The system supports compatible booster serums for customized professional skin-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Hydration treatments
-
Brightening programs
-
Anti-aging skin care
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Soothing treatments
-
Firming support
Facial Lymphatic-Drainage Support
The facial massage and drainage function supports professionally planned treatments for temporary puffiness and facial contour refinement.
Common applications include:
-
Facial massage
-
Puffiness-focused treatments
-
Circulation-support programs
-
Facial-contour care
-
Relaxation services
-
Post-cleansing facial protocols
Gesture-Control Operation
The smart operating interface includes gesture-control functionality for convenient hands-free adjustment during suitable treatment steps.
Common operating applications include:
-
Treatment-program selection
-
Intensity adjustment
-
Improved workflow
-
Reduced contact with controls
-
Efficient treatment transitions
-
Greater focus on the client
The appropriate program, treatment tip, booster serum, pressure and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol.
Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system provides 12 customizable programs. Practitioners can select an appropriate pathway according to the client’s skin condition and treatment objective.
Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Clarity
A cleansing-focused pathway for congested, oily or dull-looking skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Deep facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Pore-care programs
-
Removal of excess oil and debris
Recommended for:
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Dull complexion
-
Professional cleansing facials
Program 2: Hydration and Glow
A moisture-focused pathway designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Deep hydration
-
Dry-looking skin
-
Dull complexion
-
General skin conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Dehydrated-looking skin
-
Hydration facial packages
-
Brightening services
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation pathway for mature-looking skin, fine lines and elasticity concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Firming support
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Facial-contour care
Recommended for:
-
Professional anti-aging services
-
Mature-skin programs
-
Firming treatments
-
Premium rejuvenation packages
Program 4: Sensitive and Soothing Care
A gentler pathway for suitable sensitive-looking or temporarily reactive skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Gentle cleansing
-
Skin-comfort treatments
-
Temporary redness
-
Soothing hydration
Recommended for:
-
Sensitive-looking skin
-
First-time clients
-
Comfort-focused facials
-
Gentle maintenance programs
Twelve Programs for Customized Facial Treatments
The Elite Hydrodermabrasion System provides 12 customizable programs for different professional skin-care objectives.
| Program Category | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Cleansing Programs | Surface cleansing, exfoliation and pore-care support |
| Hydration Programs | Moisture-focused treatments and skin conditioning |
| Brightening Programs | Dull-looking skin and complexion enhancement |
| Anti-Aging Programs | Fine-line appearance and firming support |
| Acne-Care Programs | Suitable congested and acne-prone skin |
| Sensitive-Skin Programs | Gentle cleansing, hydration and comfort-focused care |
| Lymphatic Programs | Facial massage and temporary puffiness support |
| Customized Programs | Treatment-specific settings selected by the practitioner |
The available settings give trained operators greater flexibility over treatment intensity, pressure, solution selection and treatment duration.
New clients should begin with gentler settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Six Specialized Treatment Tips
Six interchangeable tips support different facial zones and professional treatment objectives.
Cleansing Tips
-
General facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Pore-care treatments
-
Removal of loosened debris
-
Facial-treatment preparation
Hydration Tips
-
Moisture-focused facials
-
Booster-serum application
-
Dry-looking skin
-
General skin conditioning
-
Brightening protocols
Targeted Treatment Tips
-
Nose and T-zone
-
Chin and jawline
-
Cheeks
-
Forehead
-
Other professionally assessed facial zones
Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected program, tip, solution, booster serum and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Program | Intended Skin-Care Application |
|---|---|---|
| Congested-looking skin | Cleansing program | Deep-cleansing and pore-care support |
| Dry or dehydrated-looking skin | Hydration program | Moisture-focused facial care |
| Fine-line appearance | Anti-aging program | Rejuvenation and firming support |
| Dull-looking complexion | Brightening program | Complexion-enhancement treatments |
| Uneven-looking tone | Brightening booster program | Tone-refinement support |
| Acne-prone skin | Acne-care program | Clarifying skin-care services |
| Sensitive-looking skin | Gentle program | Soothing and comfort-focused care |
| Temporary facial puffiness | Lymphatic program | Facial massage and contour support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Facial Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, allergies, sensitivity and contraindications.
2. System Preparation
The appropriate treatment tip, cleansing solution and booster serum are selected. Bottles, tubing and treatment components are connected according to the operating manual.
3. Program Selection
The practitioner selects one of the 12 programs and adjusts the available pressure, intensity and treatment-duration settings.
4. Hydrodermabrasion Treatment
The selected tip is moved across the treatment area using the recommended technique. Booster infusion and facial drainage steps are incorporated according to the customized protocol.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions.
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Temporary redness, dryness or sensitivity may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines advanced hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and gesture-control functionality for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Twelve customizable treatment programs
-
Six interchangeable treatment tips
-
Four included cleansing solutions
-
Multiple booster-serum options
-
Gesture-control functionality
-
Facial lymphatic-drainage support
-
Premium glass components
-
Modern professional design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System |
| Product Type | Professional hydrodermabrasion and booster-infusion system |
| Primary Technologies | Hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support |
| Treatment Programs | 12 customizable programs |
| Specialized Tips | Six interchangeable tips |
| Control System | Smart operating system with gesture control |
| Included Solutions | Four professional cleansing and treatment solutions |
| Booster Options | Brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–50 minutes |
| Construction | Premium glass and durable professional materials |
| Display Features | Illuminated waste bottle and treatment interface |
| Power Supply | Regional professional AC power configuration |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, pressure regulation and temperature monitoring |
| Research and Development | More than 15 years of WikBeauty development experience |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and technical assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main hydrodermabrasion system, six treatment tips, four cleansing solutions and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Elite Hydrodermabrasion main unit
-
Six interchangeable treatment tips
-
Hydrodermabrasion handpiece
-
Facial massage and drainage components
-
Solution and booster containers
-
Illuminated waste bottle
-
Required tubing and connection components
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Included Cleansing Solutions
-
Essence Foam
-
WikBeauty Cleansing Solution
-
Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum
-
Rejuvenating Extract
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Treatment-tip installation
-
Program-selection guidance
-
Pressure and intensity adjustment
-
Cleansing-solution guidance
-
Booster-serum selection
-
Gesture-control operation
-
Facial-treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Treatment-handpiece operation
-
Tip selection and installation
-
Operation of all 12 programs
-
Pressure and intensity adjustment
-
Cleansing-solution selection
-
Booster-serum selection
-
Gesture-control functionality
-
Facial lymphatic-drainage protocols
-
Client consultation
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Smart control system
-
Gesture-control components
-
Internal pumps
-
Original treatment handpiece
-
Handle and tubing connections
-
Other eligible components supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-tip operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of tips, tubing, filters and consumables
-
Damage caused by incompatible solutions
-
Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete skin consultation, allergy review and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Active herpes simplex
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe inflammatory acne
-
Severe rosacea aggravated by treatment
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent laser treatment or chemical peel
-
Active skin cancer or suspicious lesions
-
Known allergy to selected solutions or boosters
-
Severe sensitivity
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Pregnancy without appropriate professional guidance
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
A patch test should be performed before using a new booster serum when appropriate.
Pressure, exfoliation intensity, booster selection and treatment duration must be adjusted according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Premium skin-care studios
-
Medical spas
-
Dermatology clinics
-
Luxury beauty centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional facial specialists
-
Estheticians
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their hydrodermabrasion services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion System?
Combine Three Professional Functions
The system combines hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support in one professional platform.
Create Customized Facial Treatments
Twelve programs, six specialized tips and multiple booster-serum options support individualized facial protocols.
Improve Professional Workflow
Gesture-control functionality allows practitioners to adjust suitable settings while maintaining focus on the client and treatment process.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, brightening, acne-care, sensitive-skin and facial-contour programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does hydrodermabrasion work?
Hydrodermabrasion combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation to cleanse the skin and support hydration.
How is this system different from basic hydrodermabrasion machines?
The Elite system combines hydrodermabrasion with customizable booster-serum infusion, facial lymphatic-drainage support, 12 treatment programs, six specialized tips and gesture-control functionality.
What solutions are included?
The system includes Essence Foam, WikBeauty Cleansing Solution, Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum and Rejuvenating Extract.
What booster options are available?
Available booster categories include brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming.
How long does a professional treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Duration depends on the selected program, booster and customized protocol.
Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can select from 12 programs, six tips and multiple booster options according to the client’s skin condition and goals.
Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Gentler programs, appropriate tips and suitable soothing products can be selected for some sensitive-skin clients. A professional assessment is still required.
What is gesture control?
Gesture control allows practitioners to perform certain program or setting adjustments without directly touching the control interface.
Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, program selection, treatment-tip use, booster selection, gesture control, facial protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Elite Hydrodermabrasion to Your Facial Business
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System combines:
-
Advanced water-based hydrodermabrasion
-
Twelve customizable treatment programs
-
Six specialized treatment tips
-
Booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional training
Contact Wikbeauty to order the Elite system or receive more information about its treatment programs, booster solutions and package contents.
Order Your Elite Hydrodermabrasion System and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$1,399.00
Professional Pressotherapy and Lymphatic Massage System
Sequential Air Compression for Professional Wellness and Recovery Treatments
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is a professional air-compression therapy system developed for beauty salons, wellness centers, physiotherapy clinics, medical spas and body-contouring studios.
Its digital touchscreen provides adjustable pressure, intensity, treatment duration and program selection. Multiple overlapping air chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to create a rhythmic compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
The system can be used as a standalone wellness service or combined with suitable body-contouring and recovery programs.
Sequential air compression | Full-body garment | Adjustable treatment programs | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Pressotherapy Platform
Lymphatic Drainage
The sequential compression system supports natural lymphatic movement by applying controlled pressure through multiple overlapping air chambers.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Lymphatic drainage programs
-
Fluid-movement support
-
Leg-heaviness treatments
-
General wellness sessions
-
Post-treatment drainage support
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness programs
Water-Retention Support
The pressotherapy garment applies rhythmic compression to the selected body areas, supporting professional programs for clients concerned about temporary water retention or feelings of heaviness.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Legs
-
Thighs
-
Waist
-
Abdomen
-
Arms
-
Full body
Circulation and Recovery
Sequential compression may support circulation and recovery-oriented wellness programs.
Common applications include:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-leg treatments
-
Muscle-relaxation programs
-
General circulation support
-
Wellness and recovery sessions
-
Suitable post-procedure support programs
Relaxation and Wellness
The rhythmic inflation and deflation of the garment creates a comfortable compression-massage experience.
Common applications include:
-
Relaxation treatments
-
Spa wellness programs
-
Body-care packages
-
Stress-reduction services
-
Maintenance treatments
-
Membership-based wellness programs
The appropriate pressure, intensity, duration and program should be selected according to the client’s condition, comfort level and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Your Clients
The system supports adjustable programs for different treatment objectives. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment.
Program 1: Lymphatic Drainage
A structured sequential-compression program designed to support natural lymphatic movement.
Recommended applications:
-
General lymphatic-drainage sessions
-
Fluid-movement support
-
Tired or heavy legs
-
Wellness maintenance
Recommended for:
-
Wellness centers
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Businesses adding lymphatic-massage services
Program 2: Water-Retention Support
A customizable compression program for clients concerned about temporary water retention and feelings of heaviness.
Recommended applications:
-
Leg and thigh treatments
-
Waist and abdomen programs
-
Full-body compression sessions
-
General body-wellness services
Recommended for:
-
Spa treatment packages
-
Body-care programs
-
Wellness memberships
-
Clients seeking a lighter, refreshed feeling
Program 3: Recovery and Circulation
A rhythmic compression program designed to support circulation and recovery-focused services.
Recommended applications:
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Muscle-relaxation sessions
-
Suitable professional recovery protocols
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Sports-wellness businesses
-
Medical spas offering recovery services
Program 4: Body-Contouring Add-On
A complementary program for suitable clients receiving body-contouring treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Cryolipolysis treatment courses
-
Cavitation programs
-
Radiofrequency body treatments
-
Other suitable contouring services
Recommended for:
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Aesthetic centers
-
Medical spas
-
Businesses creating combination treatment packages
Adjustable Compression for Customized Treatments
The Pressotherapy Machine provides adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective.
| Treatment Program | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Gentle Compression | Relaxation, first-time clients and comfort-focused treatments |
| Standard Compression | General lymphatic-drainage and wellness programs |
| Targeted Compression | Selected legs, arms, waist or abdomen treatments |
| Full-Body Program | Comprehensive wellness and compression-massage sessions |
The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort.
The correct program must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment areas.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The supplied full-body garment supports targeted and comprehensive compression programs.
Leg Treatments
-
Thighs
-
Lower legs
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Leg-heaviness treatments
-
Recovery-oriented sessions
Arm Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Lower arms
-
General circulation support
-
Relaxation programs
-
Suitable recovery treatments
Waist and Abdomen Treatments
-
Waist
-
Abdomen
-
General body-wellness programs
-
Water-retention support
-
Body-contouring add-on services
Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected pressure, intensity, duration and compression program.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Program | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Legs and thighs | Sequential compression | Lymphatic-drainage and tired-leg support |
| Arms | Targeted compression | General circulation and recovery support |
| Waist and abdomen | Targeted compression | Body wellness and water-retention support |
| Full body | Full-body compression | Comprehensive relaxation and wellness |
| Lower body | Recovery program | Post-workout and muscle-recovery support |
| Body-contouring areas | Add-on program | Complementary treatment-course support |
| Tired or heavy legs | Gentle or standard compression | Comfort and relaxation |
| General wellness | Customized program | Maintenance-oriented compression massage |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. Target areas, pressure level, treatment duration and program are then selected.
2. Garment Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the appropriate garment sections are fitted over the selected treatment areas. The operator confirms that all air-hose connections are secure.
3. Parameter Selection
Pressure, intensity, duration and treatment program are selected according to the client’s comfort, treatment area and professional protocol.
4. Treatment Application
The machine sequentially inflates and deflates the overlapping air chambers, producing rhythmic waves of compression across the selected areas. A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the garment is removed and the client receives appropriate wellness and aftercare guidance.
Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary pressure marks, mild tenderness, increased urination or other short-term responses may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital touchscreen control with adjustable air-compression programs for streamlined use in professional settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Digital touchscreen control
-
Multiple overlapping air chambers
-
Sequential compression technology
-
Adjustable pressure and intensity
-
Customizable treatment duration
-
Preset wellness programs
-
Full-body treatment garment
-
Face-to-face and add-on service flexibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device |
| Product Type | Professional air-compression therapy system |
| Technology | Sequential air-pressure compression |
| Functions | Lymphatic drainage, wellness, recovery and body-care support |
| Treatment Areas | Legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body |
| Compression System | Multiple overlapping air chambers |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–45 minutes |
| Recommended Protocol | Commonly 6–12 sessions, depending on client assessment |
| Customization | Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection |
| Treatment Application | Fully clothed, non-invasive compression massage |
| Safety Features | Pressure-limit controls, automatic shut-off and protective sensors |
| Control Interface | Digital touchscreen with preset wellness programs |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Package Contents | Machine, full-body garment, power cable and manual |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, full-body compression garment and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Pressotherapy control system
-
Full-body compression garment
-
Leg garment sections
-
Arm garment sections
-
Waist and abdomen garment sections
-
Multiple overlapping air chambers
-
Air-hose connection components
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Garment-fitting instructions
-
Air-hose connection guidance
-
Pressure and intensity selection
-
Treatment-program guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Garment fitting
-
Air-hose connections
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Pressure and intensity adjustment
-
Treatment-duration selection
-
Program selection
-
Client positioning
-
Basic treatment protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Air compressor and internal pressure components
-
Original connection hoses
-
Garment connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect pressure or program selection
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of garments, hoses and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional wellness equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active deep-vein thrombosis or suspected blood clots
-
Severe peripheral vascular disease
-
Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe heart failure
-
Acute infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Unexplained swelling
-
Severe kidney disease
-
Severe liver disease
-
Untreated hypertension
-
Impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery without appropriate clearance
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The compression garment must be fitted correctly, and the selected pressure must remain comfortable throughout treatment.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Medical spas
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Professional massage providers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose This Pressotherapy System?
Offer a Comfortable Wellness Service
Sequential air compression provides a rhythmic and relaxing treatment experience that can be added to professional wellness menus.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The supplied garment supports treatments for the legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support standalone lymphatic-massage services, recovery programs, wellness packages and suitable body-contouring add-ons.
Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is pressotherapy?
Pressotherapy is a compression-massage treatment that uses multiple air chambers to apply rhythmic pressure to selected body areas. The chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to support lymphatic movement, circulation and relaxation.
How does sequential air compression work?
The garment contains overlapping air chambers that inflate and deflate in a controlled sequence. This creates a wave-like compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
Which areas can be treated?
The supplied garment supports professional treatments for the legs, thighs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes. Treatment time can be adjusted according to the selected program, treatment area and client comfort.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional program may include 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency should be selected according to the client’s condition, objectives and response.
Is pressotherapy uncomfortable?
The treatment is designed to provide rhythmic compression. Pressure and intensity can be adjusted according to client comfort. The treatment should not cause pain.
Can pressotherapy be combined with other treatments?
It may be offered as a complementary service alongside suitable cryolipolysis, cavitation, radiofrequency and other body-contouring programs following professional assessment.
Is there downtime?
Most suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Individual responses may vary.
Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Normal garment wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Pressotherapy to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device combines:
-
Sequential air-compression technology
-
Adjustable pressure and treatment programs
-
Full-body garment coverage
-
Professional wellness and recovery applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment programs, package contents and professional training.
Order Your Pressotherapy Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$2,399.00
Professional EMSlim Body-Sculpting System
Smart Fat Reduction, Muscle Toning, and Skin-Firming Technology
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is a professional, non-invasive system designed to support fat reduction, muscle development, body contouring, and firmer-looking skin within one treatment platform.
The system combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy. Electromagnetic pulses stimulate powerful muscle contractions while controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue, supporting fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Equipped with four ergonomic applicators, an intelligent touchscreen, and 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty centers, spas, wellness businesses, gyms, fitness studios, and professional body-contouring providers.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Applicators | 20–30-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT energy penetrates the treatment area and stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle toning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Thigh toning
-
Core-strengthening support
-
Improved muscle conditioning
Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled radiofrequency energy heats the treatment area while the electromagnetic function stimulates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat-reduction treatments and improves the appearance of skin firmness.
Common applications include:
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh and arm treatments
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Smoother-looking body contours
Combined Body-Contouring Technology
The simultaneous use of electromagnetic muscle stimulation and RF energy allows professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality during the same treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle building and definition
-
Fat-reduction support
-
Full-body contouring
-
Buttock toning
-
Improved skin firmness
-
Post-weight-loss body shaping
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Toning Program
A focused treatment program designed to stimulate muscle contractions and improve the appearance of strength, firmness, and definition.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, arms, and thighs.
Recommended for: Clients seeking greater muscle definition and improved body tone without intensive conventional exercise during treatment.
Fat-Reduction Program
A professional protocol that combines electromagnetic stimulation with controlled RF heating to support the reduction of localized fat deposits.
Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
Recommended for: Clients with stubborn body areas that may not respond sufficiently to diet and exercise alone.
Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A combined protocol developed to support muscle tone, fat reduction, skin firmness, and improved body contours during one structured treatment course.
Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible area combinations.
Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits rather than a single-function treatment.
Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone and body-contouring results.
Recommended applications: Previously treated areas requiring periodic muscle stimulation or contour maintenance.
Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want occasional maintenance treatments.
Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| HI-EMT Energy | Adjustable electromagnetic intensity | Allows muscle stimulation to be adapted to the treatment area and client tolerance |
| RF Energy | Adjustable controlled tissue heating | Supports fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators | Enables flexible single-area or multi-area treatment |
| Treatment Time | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Supports efficient professional appointment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions | Provides a structured program for progressive results |
| Session Frequency | Approximately two sessions per week | Supports consistent muscle stimulation and body contouring |
| Control Interface | 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen | Provides convenient treatment selection and adjustment |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports temperature management during professional operation |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility | Enables operation in different international markets |
Energy and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s response, treatment area, physical condition, and professional operating protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for combined muscle-toning and body-contouring treatments.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Improved core definition
-
Waistline contouring
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
Firmer-looking abdominal skin
-
Improved midsection shape
Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Ergonomic applicators can be positioned on compatible upper-body muscle groups to support toning and definition.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Biceps and triceps stimulation
-
Improved muscle definition
-
Localized contouring
-
Firmer-looking skin
Buttocks and Thigh Areas
The machine supports lower-body programs developed to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles while improving body contours.
Treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock toning and firming
-
Gluteal muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh contouring
-
Improved lower-body definition
-
Localized fat-reduction support
-
More balanced body proportions
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Application | Primary Area | Professional Objective |
|---|---|---|
| Abdominal Muscle Toning | Abdomen | Stimulate abdominal muscles and improve definition |
| Waistline Contouring | Waist and sides | Support a slimmer and more balanced waistline |
| Buttock Toning | Buttocks | Stimulate gluteal muscles and improve firmness |
| Thigh Sculpting | Inner and outer thighs | Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours |
| Arm Definition | Upper arms | Support biceps and triceps conditioning |
| Localized Fat Reduction | Compatible body areas | Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits |
| Skin-Firming Treatment | Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks | Improve the appearance of skin firmness |
| Muscle Conditioning | Selected muscle groups | Support strength, tone, and muscle activation |
| Post-Weight-Loss Contouring | Abdomen, thighs, arms, and buttocks | Improve body shape and muscle definition |
| Maintenance Treatment | Previously treated areas | Help maintain muscle tone and contouring results |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, physical condition, previous treatments, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Identify the treatment area, evaluate muscle condition, and determine the appropriate applicator placement and treatment program.
Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position and secure the treatment applicators over the selected muscle groups according to the professional operating protocol.
Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, electromagnetic intensity, and RF level through the intelligent touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the intensity gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, exercise, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine combines professional HI-EMT and RF technology with four applicators and an intelligent control system.
Key advantages include:
-
Combined muscle stimulation and RF technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Muscle toning and fat-reduction support
-
Multiple body-treatment applications
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Structured 4–6-session treatment courses
-
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air and water circulation cooling
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Professional training and after-sales support
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology and Radiofrequency |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Primary Functions | Fat reduction, muscle building, muscle toning, skin firming, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Approximately 4–6 sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Approximately two sessions per week |
| Muscle Contractions | Claimed equivalent of up to 30,000 crunches or squats per session |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display and Controls | 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V/220V dual compatibility |
| Certificates | CE and ISO |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| After-Sales Service | Professional training and technical support |
The stated muscle-contraction equivalent is a product-performance comparison and should not be interpreted as an exact substitute for conventional exercise. Treatment experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, muscle condition, lifestyle, settings, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine
-
4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators
-
Compatible applicator straps
-
Standard handle connections
-
1 × Compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
1 × Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Machine setup guide
-
Applicator-placement instructions
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Safety and contraindication information
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Professional operating training
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional training and technical guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers operate the EMSlim system safely and confidently.
Training and support cover:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Applicator positioning
-
HI-EMT energy adjustment
-
RF setting adjustment
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Client consultation procedures
-
Contraindication screening
-
Treatment-course planning
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
After-sales technical assistance
Ongoing support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising during normal professional operation. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are provided.
Warranty support includes:
-
Remote technical diagnosis
-
Operating and troubleshooting guidance
-
Support for eligible replacement parts
-
Repair instructions
-
Maintenance recommendations
-
After-sales communication during the warranty period
Technical Support Process
-
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information.
-
Provide a detailed explanation of the technical issue.
-
Submit clear photos or a short video when requested.
-
Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem.
-
Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions.
-
Receive eligible replacement-part support when required.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by:
-
Incorrect machine operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Accidental impact or physical damage
-
Improper voltage or electrical installation
-
Operation without the required cooling conditions
-
Water damage or unsuitable storage
-
Failure to follow maintenance instructions
-
Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and other consumable components
-
Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. The system should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations.
Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Severe liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds or damaged skin
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Severe muscle injuries
-
Abdominal or inguinal hernia
-
Reduced sensation in the treatment area
-
Any medical condition requiring professional clearance
Clients with medical conditions or implanted devices should consult a qualified healthcare professional before receiving treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Complete a consultation before every initial treatment.
-
Inspect the machine, cables, applicators, and cooling system before operation.
-
Position applicators over suitable muscle groups only.
-
Secure each applicator correctly before beginning treatment.
-
Start with a low electromagnetic intensity.
-
Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance.
-
Monitor RF warmth and client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not place applicators over the head, chest, heart, or injured tissue.
-
Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, abnormal discomfort, or skin irritation.
-
Do not exceed the recommended session duration.
-
Maintain sufficient spacing between sessions.
-
Clean and disinfect applicators after every client.
-
Follow the required cooling and maintenance procedures.
-
Use a stable and correctly grounded power source.
-
Maintain appropriate client-treatment records.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas where locally permitted
-
Wellness facilities
-
Gyms and fitness studios
-
Slimming centers
-
Professional muscle-toning providers
-
Entrepreneurs entering the aesthetic-equipment market
Users should complete appropriate operating training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine?
1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The machine combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness within one treatment program.
2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four treatment applicators provide flexible positioning and support efficient single-area or multi-area protocols.
3. Multiple Body Applications
The system supports professional treatments for the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 10–12-inch touchscreen, adjustable settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient use in busy professional environments.
5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, ongoing technical assistance, and a three-year warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radiofrequency energy. HI-EMT stimulates powerful muscle contractions while RF heats the surrounding tissue to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Q: What is the difference between HI-EMT and RF?
HI-EMT primarily stimulates muscle contractions, while radiofrequency delivers controlled thermal energy to the tissue. Combining them supports muscle toning, body contouring, and skin-firming objectives.
Q: What results can the machine support?
The machine supports improved muscle tone, greater body definition, localized fat reduction, firmer-looking skin, and more balanced body contours.
Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system works externally and does not require needles, incisions, anesthesia, or surgical procedures.
Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally feel strong muscle contractions and controlled warmth. Comfort varies, so intensity should be adjusted gradually and monitored throughout the treatment.
Q: How long does one treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes.
Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions, with around two sessions per week when suitable.
Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice improved muscle activation or firmness after several sessions. More developed changes generally appear progressively during and after the treatment course. Individual outcomes vary.
Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
Q: Can multiple areas be treated?
The machine includes four applicators, allowing professionals to create flexible treatment configurations according to the selected protocol and machine controls.
Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim should complement, not replace, regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and a healthy lifestyle.
Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to their normal activities after a session. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to post-exercise sensations may occur.
Q: Can the machine help build muscle?
HI-EMT technology stimulates repeated muscle contractions and can support improved muscle tone and conditioning through a structured treatment course.
Q: Can it reduce fat?
The combined HI-EMT and RF treatment supports localized fat-reduction programs. Outcomes depend on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment settings, and completed course.
Q: Does it tighten the skin?
Controlled RF energy can support collagen-related skin-firming treatments and improve the appearance of skin texture.
Q: Is the treatment suitable for everyone?
Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment.
Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional.
Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility.
Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates.
Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance guidance.
Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support.
Add Professional EMSlim Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine provides clinics, salons, wellness centers, and fitness businesses with a professional solution for muscle toning, fat-reduction support, body contouring, and skin firming.
Five key benefits:
-
Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology
-
Four ergonomic applicators
-
Efficient 20–30-minute treatment sessions
-
Multiple body-treatment applications
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,999.00
Professional 3-in-1 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping System
Three Dedicated Handles for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three professional treatment handles within one floor-standing touchscreen system.
The 7D and 8D handles provide focused ultrasound options for facial lifting, skin firming and contour refinement. The Thermal Shaping handle adds deeper body-contouring applications for areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
With seven included cartridges across five distinct treatment depths, the system gives trained operators the flexibility to develop professional face and body treatment protocols from one platform.
Three dedicated handles | Seven cartridges | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System
7D HIFU Handle
The 7D handle is supplied with three cartridge depths for professional facial and neck treatments:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
These cartridges allow trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for different facial areas and tissue layers.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin firming
-
Improvement in the appearance of fine lines
-
Brow-area lifting
-
Cheek contouring
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck treatments
8D HIFU Handle
The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for focused facial lifting and contour-refinement protocols.
It can be incorporated into treatments focused on:
-
Lower-face firming
-
Cheek lifting
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck tightening
-
Deeper facial treatment protocols
The 7D and 8D handles provide different delivery formats. The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the system’s applications from facial treatments to professional body contouring.
It includes:
-
0.8 mm cartridge
-
13 mm cartridge
The deeper cartridge is designed for body areas with suitable subcutaneous tissue, while the shallower cartridge supports more targeted treatment protocols.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
Seven Cartridges Across Five Treatment Depths
The system includes seven cartridges in total. Some depths appear on both the 7D and 8D handles.
| Handle | Included cartridges | Intended application |
|---|---|---|
| 7D HIFU | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Facial lifting and skin firming |
| 8D HIFU | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Focused facial and neck treatments |
| Thermal Shaping | 0.8 mm and 13 mm | Targeted and deeper body-contouring protocols |
The five distinct depths are:
0.8 mm · 1.5 mm · 3.0 mm · 4.5 mm · 13 mm
Cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional training.
How the System Works
The machine delivers controlled focused energy through the selected handle and cartridge.
For facial applications, the 7D and 8D handles direct energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When used correctly, this controlled energy supports the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes.
For body applications, the Thermal Shaping handle provides deeper treatment options for appropriately selected areas with localized tissue concerns.
The touchscreen interface allows the operator to select the applicable handle, cartridge and treatment parameters.
Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Applicable handle | Common treatment areas |
|---|---|---|
| Facial skin firming | 7D HIFU | Forehead, cheeks and lower face |
| Focused facial lifting | 8D HIFU | Cheeks, jawline and neck |
| Fine-line treatments | 7D HIFU | Suitable facial areas |
| Jawline contouring | 7D or 8D HIFU | Lower face and jawline |
| Neck firming | 7D or 8D HIFU | Neck and submental area |
| Body contouring | Thermal Shaping | Abdomen, waist and back |
| Body firming | Thermal Shaping | Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks |
Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment.
Build a Focused Treatment Menu
Facial Firming Treatments
Use the 7D handle with 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial protocols at multiple depths.
Focused Lifting Treatments
The 8D handle provides an additional treatment format for the cheeks, jawline, lower face and neck.
Jawline and Neck Contouring
Both facial handles can support structured protocols for clients concerned with lower-face definition and skin laxity.
Professional Body Contouring
The Thermal Shaping handle expands the service menu to include suitable areas of the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs.
Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may build structured treatment plans using different handles. Each area must be assessed independently, and the technologies should only be combined when appropriate.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The black-and-white floor-standing console combines three treatment technologies in one organized system.
Key design features include:
-
Integrated touchscreen control
-
Three dedicated treatment handles
-
Side-mounted handle storage
-
Seven included cartridges
-
Facial and body treatment capabilities
-
110 V and 230 V power options
-
Stable floor-standing construction
-
Centralized operation from one console
At 47 kg, the machine is intended to remain stable during daily professional use while still allowing planned repositioning within a treatment environment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications.
2. Handle Selection
The 7D, 8D or Thermal Shaping handle is selected according to whether the treatment is focused on facial lifting, skin firming or body contouring.
3. Cartridge Selection
The appropriate cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy.
4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where necessary. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling medium is applied according to the operating instructions.
5. Parameter Selection
The operator adjusts the available settings according to the selected handle, cartridge, treatment area and client tolerance.
6. Controlled Treatment
Energy is delivered using the recommended positioning and technique. The operator monitors the client’s comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives suitable aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur. Recovery experience varies by technology, treatment intensity and individual response.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping system |
| Included technologies | 7D HIFU, 8D HIFU and Thermal Shaping |
| Machine design | Black-and-white floor-standing console |
| Control interface | Touchscreen |
| Treatment handles | Three dedicated handles |
| 7D cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| 8D cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Thermal Shaping cartridges | 0.8 mm and 13 mm |
| Total included cartridges | Seven |
| Distinct treatment depths | Five |
| Machine dimensions | 110 × 67 × 76 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 47 kg |
| Power options | 110 V or 230 V |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One 3-in-1 floor-standing touchscreen console
-
One 7D HIFU handle
-
One 8D HIFU handle
-
One Thermal Shaping handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected voltage
-
Starter conductive gel, where applicable
7D HIFU Cartridges
-
One 1.5 mm cartridge
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
8D HIFU Cartridges
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
Thermal Shaping Cartridges
-
One 0.8 mm cartridge
-
One 13 mm cartridge
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Setup guidance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Handle installation
-
Cartridge installation and selection
-
Basic treatment-parameter adjustment
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original 7D HIFU handle
-
Original 8D HIFU handle
-
Original Thermal Shaping handle
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
Cartridges and other limited-use or consumable components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Incorrect cartridge installation
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
The order number, machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments in the area
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This 3-in-1 system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their face and body services
The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Dedicated Treatment Handles
The 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping technologies each have a dedicated handle for their intended applications.
Complete Face and Body Coverage
Offer professional facial lifting, skin firming and body-contouring services from one platform.
Multiple Treatment Depths
Seven included cartridges provide five distinct depths ranging from 0.8 mm to 13 mm.
Efficient Use of Treatment-Room Space
A single console replaces the need for separate facial HIFU and body-contouring control units.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the 7D and 8D handles?
The 7D handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges and provides an additional delivery format for focused lifting protocols.
The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area and professional protocol rather than describing one handle simply as stronger than the other.
What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 0.8 mm and 13 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring and firming treatments on appropriately selected areas.
How many cartridges are included?
Seven cartridges are included across the three handles. Because the 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths are included with both facial handles, the system has five distinct depth options.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the handle, cartridge, energy level and individual sensitivity. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
How many treatments will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised.
What are the dimensions and weight?
The machine measures approximately 110 × 67 × 76 cm and has a net weight of approximately 47 kg.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three dedicated technologies within one professional platform:
-
7D HIFU for facial firming
-
8D HIFU for focused lifting protocols
-
Thermal Shaping for body contouring
Choose the appropriate voltage and contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, purchasing assistance and delivery information.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
Buy 2+ machines and save up to 15% — get a personalized quote within 24 hours.
$2,999.00
Professional Standing SMAS HIFU System
Blade Tip and Cannon Head Technology for Face and Body Treatments
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is a professional face and body treatment platform combining two Blade Tip handles with one Cannon Head handle.
Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths, ranging from 1.5 mm to 13 mm, support facial skin firming, SMAS-focused lifting and deeper body-contouring protocols. The Cannon Head handle provides precise fixed-point energy delivery through 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges.
Its freestanding trolley design keeps the machine, handles and cables organized while allowing convenient movement within the treatment environment.
Three treatment handles | 1.5–13 mm depth range | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Two Complementary HIFU Handle Systems
Blade Tip Handles
The machine includes two Blade Tip handles for professional face and body HIFU treatments.
Available cartridge depths include:
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
6.0 mm
-
9.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
The broad depth range allows trained operators to select an appropriate cartridge for facial, neck or body applications.
Shallower cartridges support facial skin-firming protocols, while the deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are designed for appropriately selected body areas.
Cannon Head Handle
The Cannon Head handle provides fixed-point focused ultrasound delivery for more targeted facial treatments.
It includes:
-
1.5 mm cartridge
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
This handle is designed for controlled work on suitable areas of the face, jawline and neck where precise energy placement is required.
Seven Depth Options from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
Different facial and body areas require different treatment depths.
| Cartridge depth | Handle | Intended professional application |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5 mm | Blade Tip or Cannon Head | Superficial facial protocols |
| 2.0 mm | Blade Tip | Precision facial treatments |
| 3.0 mm | Blade Tip or Cannon Head | Facial and neck applications |
| 4.5 mm | Blade Tip or Cannon Head | Deeper facial and SMAS-focused protocols |
| 6.0 mm | Blade Tip | Shallow body applications |
| 9.0 mm | Blade Tip | Medium-depth body treatments |
| 13.0 mm | Blade Tip | Deeper body-contouring protocols |
This table provides general application guidance. Cartridge depth must be selected according to client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional training.
How SMAS HIFU Technology Works
HIFU stands for High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound.
The system delivers controlled ultrasound energy to a selected depth below the skin’s surface without creating a surgical incision. When correctly applied, the energy produces focused thermal points within the targeted tissue.
This controlled response supports the body’s natural collagen-remodeling process and may be incorporated into professional treatments focused on lifting, firming and contour refinement.
HIFU is an ultrasound-based technology and should not be described as a laser treatment.
Individual results vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Common areas | Intended aesthetic application |
|---|---|---|
| Upper-face treatments | Forehead and brow area | Firming and lifting protocols |
| Facial contouring | Cheeks and lower face | Contour refinement |
| Jawline treatments | Jawline and submental area | Definition and firming |
| Neck treatments | Neck and suitable décolletage areas | Skin-firming protocols |
| Body contouring | Abdomen, waist and back | Non-invasive contour refinement |
| Body firming | Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks | Skin-firming treatments |
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
Precision Face and Body Treatment Planning
Facial Skin Firming
The 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm and 3.0 mm cartridges support professional protocols for suitable superficial and mid-depth facial areas.
SMAS-Focused Lifting
The 4.5 mm cartridge is commonly incorporated into professional lifting protocols for appropriately selected areas of the lower face and neck.
Fixed-Point Facial Treatments
The Cannon Head handle provides controlled energy placement for detailed facial work using 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges.
Professional Body Contouring
The deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm Blade Tip cartridges extend treatment possibilities to suitable areas of the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
Structured Treatment Programs
Qualified operators may create individual face or body treatment plans using the appropriate handle and cartridge. Each area must be assessed separately.
Freestanding Trolley Design
The integrated trolley configuration is designed for organized daily operation in a professional treatment environment.
Key design advantages include:
-
Stable floor-standing construction
-
Integrated rolling base
-
Three dedicated handle positions
-
Organized cable management
-
Central digital control interface
-
Convenient repositioning between treatment rooms
-
Professional black-and-white appearance
-
Compact all-in-one equipment arrangement
The machine weighs approximately 50 kg and should be moved carefully on level indoor surfaces.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition and contraindications.
2. Treatment Planning
The operator selects the Blade Tip or Cannon Head handle and chooses a suitable cartridge depth according to the treatment area.
3. Skin Preparation
The skin is cleansed and marked where required. Conductive gel or the recommended ultrasound coupling medium is applied.
4. Parameter Selection
The machine settings are adjusted according to the cartridge depth, treatment area, client condition and recommended protocol.
5. Controlled Energy Delivery
The selected handle is positioned correctly and focused ultrasound energy is delivered using the approved technique.
6. Client Monitoring
The operator monitors client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Energy settings should be adjusted when necessary.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Recovery experience varies between clients.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional standing SMAS HIFU machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Equipment design | Freestanding trolley with rolling base |
| Treatment handles | Two Blade Tip handles and one Cannon Head handle |
| Blade Tip cartridges | 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm, 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm |
| Cannon Head cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Total depth range | 1.5–13.0 mm |
| Machine dimensions | 59 × 70 × 152 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 50 kg |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
Electrical specifications should be confirmed according to the voltage selected for the final order.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One standing SMAS HIFU trolley unit
-
Two Blade Tip handles
-
One Cannon Head handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Starter conductive gel
Blade Tip Cartridges
-
1.5 mm cartridge
-
2.0 mm cartridge
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
-
6.0 mm cartridge
-
9.0 mm cartridge
-
13.0 mm cartridge
Cannon Head Cartridges
-
1.5 mm cartridge
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Installation guidance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Control-interface operation
-
Blade Tip handle operation
-
Cannon Head handle operation
-
Cartridge installation and selection
-
Basic parameter adjustment
-
Facial and body treatment protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
HIFU safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace professional anatomy training, qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital control system
-
Original Blade Tip handles
-
Original Cannon Head handle
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
Cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Incorrect cartridge installation
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
The order number, serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
HIFU treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments in the area
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
Focused energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their face and body services
The system is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This Standing SMAS HIFU Machine?
Two Complementary Handle Designs
Blade Tip handles provide a wide facial and body depth range, while the Cannon Head handle supports precise fixed-point facial treatments.
Complete 1.5–13 mm Depth Range
Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths support professional treatments from superficial facial applications to deeper body-contouring protocols.
Three Dedicated Handles
Two Blade Tip handles and one Cannon Head handle provide greater operational flexibility.
Face and Body Applications
Offer facial lifting, skin firming, jawline contouring and professional body-contouring services from one platform.
Freestanding Professional Design
The integrated trolley keeps the console, handles and cabling organized while allowing convenient repositioning.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the Blade Tip and Cannon Head handles?
The Blade Tip handles support cartridge depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm for facial and body applications. The Cannon Head handle uses 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for precise fixed-point facial treatments.
What do the different cartridge depths do?
Shallower cartridges support suitable facial applications. The 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges are used in professional facial and SMAS-focused protocols. The deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are designed for appropriately selected body areas.
Is HIFU a laser treatment?
No. HIFU uses focused ultrasound energy. It is not a laser technology.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, cartridge depth, energy setting and individual sensitivity. Warmth, tingling or temporary discomfort may occur.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur.
How many treatments will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed result should not be promised.
How often can treatment be repeated?
Treatment intervals depend on the area treated, energy settings, client response and professional protocol. Sufficient time should be allowed for the tissue response before repeating treatment.
What are the machine’s dimensions and weight?
The machine measures approximately 59 × 70 × 152 cm and weighs approximately 50 kg.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Professional HIFU Services
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine combines:
-
Two Blade Tip handles for face and body applications
-
One Cannon Head handle for precise facial treatments
-
Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, available voltage options, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
De la $1,799.00
Professional Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 System
Four Dedicated Technologies for Facial Lifting, Skin Refinement and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine combines four professional aesthetic treatment handles within one premium desktop platform.
The system includes a multi-line 4D HIFU handle, a Single-Point HIFU and RF handle, a Skin Knife handle and a Thermal Shaping handle. Together, they support professional services focused on facial lifting, skin firming, contour refinement and non-invasive body treatments.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, multiple cartridge depths and pre-programmed protocols provide trained operators with greater treatment flexibility from one compact system.
Four dedicated handles | 1.5–13 mm depth range | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Technologies in One Machine
Multi-Line 4D HIFU Handle
The 4D HIFU handle delivers multiple treatment lines with each activation, supporting more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line HIFU system.
It includes facial and body cartridges ranging from 1.5 mm to 9.0 mm.
Facial cartridges:
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Body cartridges:
-
6.0 mm
-
9.0 mm
The available depths allow trained operators to create protocols for facial skin firming, jawline definition, neck treatments and suitable body areas.
Single-Point HIFU and RF Handle
The Single-Point handle combines focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery within a targeted treatment format.
Available cartridge depths include:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
This handle is designed for controlled energy placement on appropriately selected facial or body areas.
The exact HIFU and RF parameters must be selected according to professional training, the treatment area and client suitability.
Skin Knife Handle
The Skin Knife handle uses blade-style cartridges designed to distribute energy across broader treatment areas.
Available depths include:
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
It can be incorporated into professional programs focused on skin firming, texture refinement and overall facial rejuvenation.
Despite its name, the Skin Knife handle is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin.
Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the machine’s applications to professional body-contouring treatments.
Available cartridge depths include:
-
8.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
These deeper cartridges are intended for appropriately selected areas with sufficient tissue depth, including the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs.
Multiple Delivery Formats for Customized Treatments
Each handle provides a different method of energy delivery.
| Handle | Delivery format | Primary application |
|---|---|---|
| Multi-Line 4D HIFU | Multiple treatment lines per activation | Facial lifting and efficient area coverage |
| Single-Point HIFU and RF | Targeted point delivery | Precise facial and body protocols |
| Skin Knife | Broader blade-style delivery | Skin firming and texture refinement |
| Thermal Shaping | Deeper body-treatment delivery | Professional body contouring |
Handle and cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment goals and professional training.
Multi-Line HIFU for Efficient Coverage
The 4D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation, depending on the selected settings and cartridge.
Compared with a conventional single-line system, multi-line delivery may provide:
-
More efficient treatment-area coverage
-
More consistent line distribution
-
Reduced repetitive handle repositioning
-
Greater flexibility for larger facial areas
-
More streamlined professional workflows
The supplied specifications indicate a cartridge capacity of up to 10,000 shots. Actual capacity depends on the cartridge and operating configuration.
Higher line output does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection and knowledge of facial anatomy.
Treatment Depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
| Cartridge depth | Compatible handle | Intended professional application |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5 mm | 4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife | Superficial facial protocols |
| 2.0 mm | 4D HIFU, Skin Knife | Precision facial applications |
| 3.0 mm | 4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife | Facial and neck treatments |
| 4.5 mm | 4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife | Deeper facial and SMAS-focused protocols |
| 6.0 mm | 4D HIFU | Shallow body applications |
| 8.0 mm | Thermal Shaping | Medium-depth body treatments |
| 9.0 mm | 4D HIFU or Single-Point | Body-contouring protocols |
| 13.0 mm | Thermal Shaping | Deeper body applications |
This table provides general positioning information. The correct depth must be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and approved professional protocol.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Common areas | Applicable technology |
|---|---|---|
| Facial skin firming | Forehead, cheeks and lower face | 4D HIFU or Skin Knife |
| Fine-line treatments | Suitable facial areas | Skin Knife or Single-Point |
| Jawline contouring | Lower face and jawline | 4D HIFU or Single-Point |
| Neck firming | Neck and submental area | 4D HIFU |
| Skin-texture refinement | Face and suitable neck areas | Skin Knife |
| Body contouring | Abdomen, waist and back | Thermal Shaping |
| Body firming | Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks | Thermal Shaping or body HIFU |
A complete client consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
How HIFU and RF Technologies Work
HIFU stands for High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound.
HIFU delivers controlled ultrasound energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When applied correctly, the focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes.
Radiofrequency uses controlled electrical energy to generate heat within suitable tissue layers. The Single-Point handle combines HIFU and RF delivery for targeted professional protocols.
The Thermal Shaping handle uses deeper cartridge options for appropriately selected body areas.
Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response.
Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Multi-Line Facial HIFU
Use the 4D HIFU handle for structured facial lifting and firming treatments with efficient multi-line coverage.
Targeted HIFU and RF Treatments
The Single-Point handle supports focused protocols for suitable areas requiring precise energy placement.
Skin-Firming and Refinement Services
The Skin Knife handle provides broader energy delivery for professional skin-firming and texture-focused treatments.
Body-Contouring Services
The Thermal Shaping handle adds professional body treatments for appropriately selected areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified operators may develop treatment plans using more than one handle when appropriate. Compatibility, sequence and treatment intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols.
Premium Desktop Design
The gold desktop housing combines four technologies within a compact professional format.
Key design features include:
-
Gold professional housing
-
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
-
Four dedicated treatment handles
-
Multiple facial and body cartridges
-
Pre-programmed operating protocols
-
Adjustable energy and depth controls
-
Automatic shut-off function
-
AC 110–220 V compatibility
-
Approximately 21 kg net weight
The machine should be installed on a stable, level treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications.
2. Handle Selection
The appropriate treatment handle is selected according to whether the protocol focuses on lifting, targeted energy delivery, skin refinement or body contouring.
3. Cartridge Selection
The cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy.
4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where required. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling material is applied.
5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other available settings are adjusted according to the selected protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The operator delivers energy using the correct technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the technology and individual response.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 4-in-1 HIFU and body-contouring system |
| Machine design | Gold desktop housing |
| Control interface | 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen |
| Treatment handles | Four |
| Included technologies | Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping |
| 4D HIFU facial cartridges | 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| 4D HIFU body cartridges | 6.0 mm and 9.0 mm |
| Single-Point cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm |
| Skin Knife cartridges | 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Thermal Shaping cartridges | 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm |
| Multi-line output | Up to 12 lines per activation |
| Cartridge capacity | Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge |
| Rated power | 200 W |
| Input voltage | AC 110–220 V |
| Machine dimensions | 54 × 45 × 52 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 21 kg |
| Safety functions | Automatic shut-off and adjustable operating limits |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 touchscreen console
-
One Multi-Line 4D HIFU handle
-
One Single-Point HIFU and RF handle
-
One Skin Knife handle
-
One Thermal Shaping handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Starter conductive gel
Multi-Line 4D HIFU Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
6.0 mm
-
9.0 mm
Single-Point HIFU and RF Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
Skin Knife Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Thermal Shaping Cartridges
-
8.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Setup guidance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Handle and cartridge installation
-
Multi-Line HIFU operation
-
Single-Point HIFU and RF operation
-
Skin Knife operation
-
Thermal Shaping operation
-
Basic treatment-parameter selection
-
Facial and body protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace anatomy training, professional qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
-
Eligible repair labor during the warranty period
Cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Incorrect cartridge installation
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin disorders
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their face and body services
The system is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose the Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine?
Four Dedicated Technologies
Combine multi-line HIFU, targeted HIFU and RF, Skin Knife treatments and Thermal Shaping within one professional platform.
Efficient Multi-Line Delivery
The 4D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for more efficient coverage.
Complete Face and Body Depth Range
Cartridge options extend from 1.5 mm for superficial facial applications to 13 mm for deeper body protocols.
Premium Desktop Design
The gold housing and 15-inch touchscreen create a refined presentation in a professional treatment room.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “4-in-1” mean?
The system combines four dedicated technologies: Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping.
How is 4D HIFU different from conventional single-line HIFU?
The 4D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation. This provides more efficient coverage than repeatedly delivering one line at a time.
What does the Single-Point HIFU and RF handle do?
It combines targeted focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery for precise professional protocols. Settings and treatment placement must follow the supplied training.
Does the Skin Knife cut the skin?
No. “Skin Knife” is the name used for its blade-style treatment cartridge. It is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin.
What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the technology, area, cartridge depth and energy setting. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine brings four complementary treatment technologies into one premium desktop platform:
-
Multi-Line 4D HIFU
-
Single-Point HIFU and RF
-
Skin Knife
-
Thermal Shaping
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$2,799.00
Professional Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound System
Three Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Gold RF Microneedling and 7D Ultrasound Machine combines three professional aesthetic technologies within one floor-standing system.
It includes a Gold RF Microneedling handle, a 7D Focused Ultrasound handle and a 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle. Together, these technologies support professional treatment programs focused on facial rejuvenation, skin-texture refinement, lifting, body contouring and intimate care.
The vertical design provides organized handle storage and a compact professional footprint for beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics.
Three dedicated technologies | Face, body and intimate care | Adjustable treatment depths | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System
Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines adjustable microneedle penetration with controlled bipolar radiofrequency energy.
The needles enter the skin at a selected depth while RF energy is delivered to the targeted tissue. This controlled process can be incorporated into professional treatments focused on collagen remodeling and skin rejuvenation.
The microneedling depth is adjustable from 0.5 mm to 3.5 mm.
Common applications include:
-
Improvement in skin texture
-
Appearance of enlarged pores
-
Fine-line treatments
-
Uneven-looking skin tone
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Facial and body skin firming
-
General skin-rejuvenation programs
RF microneedling is a minimally invasive treatment and requires appropriate hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures.
7D Focused Ultrasound
The 7D handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at selectable depths for professional face and body treatments.
It includes four cartridge depths:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
The shallower cartridges support facial skin-firming and lifting protocols, while the 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas.
360° Intimate Ultrasound
The dedicated Intimate Ultrasound handle delivers focused ultrasound energy in a 360° treatment pattern.
It includes:
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
The handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted.
Intimate treatments must only be performed by appropriately qualified professionals following strict consultation, informed-consent, privacy, hygiene and safety procedures.
Four RF Microneedling Tip Options
The RF Microneedling handle includes four tip configurations for different treatment areas and professional protocols.
| Tip | Intended professional application |
|---|---|
| Nano tip | Superficial, non-needle skin-contact protocols |
| 10-pin tip | Precise treatment of smaller areas |
| 25-pin tip | Medium-area facial treatments |
| 64-pin tip | Broader face or body coverage |
The Nano tip does not penetrate the skin in the same way as the microneedle cartridges. The 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin tips contain needles and must follow professional infection-control requirements.
Tip selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition and intended protocol.
Vacuum-Assisted RF Microneedling Operation
The RF Microneedling handle includes a vacuum-assisted contact system designed to support stable placement during treatment.
Professional operating features include:
-
Adjustable needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm
-
Manual operating mode
-
Automatic operating mode
-
Vacuum-assisted skin contact
-
Automatic needle-release function
-
Interchangeable treatment tips
-
Adjustable RF treatment parameters
The vacuum feature supports consistent contact but does not replace correct handpiece positioning, professional judgment or client monitoring.
Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
| Treatment category | Technology | Common applications |
|---|---|---|
| Facial lifting | 7D Focused Ultrasound | Face, lower face, jawline and neck |
| Skin rejuvenation | RF Microneedling | Texture, pores and fine-line appearance |
| Targeted facial treatments | RF Microneedling | Suitable areas around the mouth and face |
| Body firming | 7D Ultrasound or RF Microneedling | Arms, legs and selected body areas |
| Body contouring | 7D Focused Ultrasound | Appropriately selected areas |
| Intimate care | 360° Intimate Ultrasound | Specialized professional protocols |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
How the Technologies Work
Radiofrequency Microneedling
Insulated microneedles penetrate to a controlled depth and deliver RF energy within the selected tissue layer.
This creates a controlled treatment response intended to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture.
Focused Ultrasound
The 7D and Intimate Care handles deliver focused ultrasound energy at a selected depth below the surface.
When applied correctly, focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response without creating a surgical incision.
Individual results vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response.
Build a Complete Professional Treatment Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
The 7D Ultrasound handle supports professional protocols for the face, jawline and neck using 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges.
Advanced Skin Rejuvenation
The RF Microneedling handle supports customizable treatments focused on texture, pores, fine lines and general skin quality.
Body Firming and Contouring
The 9.0 mm 7D cartridge and suitable RF Microneedling tips expand the treatment menu to appropriately selected body areas.
Intimate Wellness Services
The 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle enables qualified operators to add specialized intimate-care services where legally permitted.
Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified professionals may develop treatment plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, intervals and compatibility must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition and contraindications.
Additional informed-consent and privacy procedures are required for intimate treatments.
2. Technology Selection
The RF Microneedling, 7D Ultrasound or Intimate Ultrasound handle is selected according to the intended treatment.
3. Tip or Cartridge Selection
The operator selects the appropriate needle tip, Nano tip or ultrasound cartridge.
4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the selected technology. Appropriate disinfection and sterile supplies are required for microneedling.
5. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, ultrasound depth and other available settings are adjusted according to the professional protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and tissue response are monitored throughout the procedure.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and suitable aftercare instructions are provided.
RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint bleeding or mild crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary redness, tenderness, tingling or swelling.
Recovery experience varies between clients.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional vertical 3-in-1 aesthetic system |
| Included technologies | Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound |
| Machine design | Vertical floor-standing unit |
| Treatment handles | Three dedicated handles |
| 7D Ultrasound cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm |
| Intimate Ultrasound cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| RF Microneedling tips | Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin |
| Microneedling depth | Adjustable from 0.5–3.5 mm |
| Needle operating modes | Manual and automatic |
| Contact system | Vacuum-assisted skin contact |
| Safety features | Vacuum sensor, automatic needle release and adjustable depth controls |
| Control system | Digital display with treatment controls and status indicator |
| Machine dimensions | 64 × 62 × 120 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 43 kg |
| Power supply | Regional voltage and plug configurations available |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One vertical 3-in-1 control unit
-
One Gold RF Microneedling handle
-
One 7D Focused Ultrasound handle
-
One 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
7D Ultrasound Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
Intimate Ultrasound Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
RF Microneedling Tips
-
Nano tip
-
10-pin tip
-
25-pin tip
-
64-pin tip
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final tip quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Digital control operation
-
RF Microneedling handle operation
-
7D Ultrasound handle operation
-
Intimate Ultrasound handle operation
-
Needle-tip and cartridge installation
-
Basic treatment-parameter selection
-
Hygiene and infection-control procedures
-
Facial, body and intimate-care protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital display and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Vacuum system
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original components
-
Eligible repair labor during the warranty period
Microneedling tips, ultrasound cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal depletion of cartridges or tips
-
Reuse of single-use microneedling components
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Use of medications that affect healing or bleeding
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling must be performed using appropriate hygiene and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle tips must not be reused.
Intimate-Care Safety
Intimate treatments require appropriate professional training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls.
Operators must confirm that intimate treatment is permitted within their professional scope and applicable local regulations.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Vertical 3-in-1 System is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified intimate-care providers
-
Appropriately trained independent practitioners
The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Complementary Technologies
Combine RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound within one professional platform.
Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
Develop multiple professional service categories without purchasing three separate control units.
Adjustable RF Microneedling Depth
Select a needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
Four Microneedling Tip Options
Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin options support different areas and treatment objectives.
Vacuum-Assisted Operation
The vacuum sensor and automatic needle-release function support stable contact and controlled operation.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “3-in-1” mean?
The machine combines Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound. Each technology has its own dedicated treatment handle.
Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate disinfection, single-use components and post-treatment care are required.
What is the difference between the RF Microneedling tips?
The Nano tip supports superficial skin-contact protocols. The 10-pin tip provides precise treatment of smaller areas, while the 25-pin and 64-pin tips provide progressively broader coverage.
What do the 7D Ultrasound cartridge depths treat?
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges support professional facial and neck protocols. The 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas.
What is the Intimate Ultrasound handle used for?
It is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols using 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. It must only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals where legally permitted.
Is intimate ultrasound safe?
Safety depends on client selection, operator training, correct parameters, hygiene and adherence to contraindications. It should not be described as risk-free or universally suitable.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies. RF microneedling may cause discomfort, while ultrasound treatments may produce warmth, tingling or tenderness.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery depends on the technology and individual response. RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary tenderness or swelling.
How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, area, client condition and protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Tips, cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System combines three professional technologies within one floor-standing platform:
-
Gold RF Microneedling
-
7D Focused Ultrasound
-
360° Intimate Ultrasound
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$1,999.00
Professional RF Thermal Face-Lifting System
Dual-Handle Technology with Three Treatment Depths
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine is a professional radiofrequency thermal-treatment system developed for facial firming, contour refinement and skin-rejuvenation services.
Two dedicated treatment handles—the Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head—provide different energy-delivery formats for detailed facial work and focused treatment applications.
Three interchangeable probes at 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm allow trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for different facial areas and professional protocols.
Its compact 19 kg desktop design is suitable for aesthetic clinics, medical spas, beauty salons and qualified independent practitioners.
Two professional handles | Three probe depths | 19 kg desktop design | Three-year warranty
Two Complementary Treatment Handles
Dual-Bo Blade Handle
The Dual-Bo Blade handle is designed for controlled energy delivery across appropriate facial areas.
Its blade-style treatment format supports professional protocols focused on:
-
Facial skin firming
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Skin-texture refinement
-
Lower-face contouring
-
Suitable areas around the forehead and cheeks
Despite its name, the Blade handle is not a surgical instrument and does not cut the skin.
Cannon Head Handle
The Cannon Head handle provides focused-point energy placement for areas requiring a more targeted treatment approach.
It may be incorporated into professional protocols for:
-
Jawline definition
-
Lower-face firming
-
Neck contour refinement
-
Targeted facial areas
-
Deeper treatment protocols
The correct handle should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue condition and operator training.
Three Probe Depths for Customized Treatments
P1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Protocols
The 1.5 mm probe is intended for controlled treatment of suitable superficial facial areas.
Common applications include:
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Skin-texture refinement
-
Appearance of enlarged pores
-
Superficial skin-firming protocols
-
Maintenance treatments
Extra caution is required when working near delicate facial structures. Energy must not be applied directly over the eyes or eyelids.
P3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Treatment
The 3.0 mm probe supports professional protocols targeting deeper facial tissue than the 1.5 mm option.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin firming
-
Appearance of moderate lines
-
Cheek treatments
-
Lower-face contour refinement
-
General facial rejuvenation
P4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Protocols
The 4.5 mm probe is designed for deeper treatment applications on appropriately selected areas.
It may be incorporated into protocols focused on:
-
Lower-face lifting
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck firming
-
Contour refinement
-
Suitable areas with sufficient tissue depth
Probe depth must always be selected according to facial anatomy, tissue thickness and professional treatment guidelines.
Professional Facial Applications
| Treatment category | Common area | Intended aesthetic application |
|---|---|---|
| Facial firming | Cheeks and lower face | Firmer-looking facial contours |
| Fine-line treatments | Forehead and suitable facial areas | Improvement in line appearance |
| Skin-texture refinement | Cheeks and broader facial areas | Smoother-looking texture |
| Jawline contouring | Lower face and jawline | Definition and contour refinement |
| Neck treatments | Suitable neck areas | Firming and profile refinement |
| Pore-appearance treatments | Appropriate facial areas | Improvement in visible pore appearance |
Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response.
How RF Thermal Technology Works
Radiofrequency technology uses controlled electrical energy to generate heat within selected tissue layers.
When applied correctly, this controlled thermal response supports collagen remodeling and may improve the appearance of skin firmness, texture and facial contours over time.
The operator selects the treatment handle, probe depth and available parameters according to the treatment area and client assessment.
The system is intended for aesthetic skin-firming and contour-refinement treatments. It should not be marketed as permanently removing wrinkles, eliminating fat or producing a surgical facelift.
Manufacturer-Reported Evaluation Data
The supplied product information lists the following evaluation results:
| Evaluated concern | Manufacturer-reported improvement |
|---|---|
| Visible pore appearance | 31.54% |
| Jawline appearance | 21.78% |
| Skin brightness | 21.90% |
| Skin firmness | 13.28% |
| Fine-line appearance | 29.63% |
These figures should be described as manufacturer-reported evaluation data.
Build a Professional Facial Treatment Menu
Full-Face Firming
Combine appropriate probe depths to develop a structured treatment for suitable areas of the forehead, cheeks and lower face.
Jawline and Lower-Face Contouring
Use the appropriate handle and deeper probe option for clients concerned with lower-face definition and visible skin laxity.
Fine-Line and Texture Treatments
The shallower probe can support protocols focused on suitable superficial areas and overall skin-texture appearance.
Neck-Firming Treatments
Develop targeted neck protocols following careful anatomical assessment and contraindication screening.
Maintenance Treatments
Suitable clients may receive periodic treatments according to their individual response and professional treatment plan.
Compact Professional Desktop Design
At approximately 19 kg, the machine combines professional operation with a relatively compact desktop format.
Key design features include:
-
Two dedicated thermal-treatment handles
-
Three interchangeable probe depths
-
Durable ABS machine housing
-
Compact desktop installation
-
Organized professional setup
-
Suitable for dedicated treatment rooms
-
Easier repositioning than a large floor-standing system
The machine should be placed on a stable, level treatment trolley or work surface with adequate ventilation.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures and contraindications.
2. Handle Selection
The Dual-Bo Blade or Cannon Head handle is selected according to the intended treatment technique.
3. Probe Selection
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm probe is selected according to the treatment area and tissue depth.
4. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where necessary. The recommended coupling medium is applied when required.
5. Parameter Selection
Energy and other available settings are adjusted according to the client’s condition, treatment area and professional protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The operator applies the selected handle using correct placement and technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, warmth, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. Recovery experience varies between clients.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional RF thermal face-lifting system |
| Technology | Radiofrequency thermal treatment |
| Treatment handles | Two |
| Handle types | Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head |
| Probe depths | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Machine design | Portable desktop system |
| Construction | ABS housing |
| Machine dimensions | 57 × 48 × 43 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 19 kg |
| Intended users | Aesthetic clinics, medical spas, beauty salons and trained practitioners |
| Warranty | Three-year limited professional warranty |
Only certifications actually supplied with this exact model should be listed on the final product page.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Thermal Face Lift desktop console
-
One Dual-Bo Blade handle
-
One Cannon Head handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Starter treatment consumables, where applicable
Treatment Probes
-
One P1.5 mm probe
-
One P3.0 mm probe
-
One P4.5 mm probe
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate upon completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Dual-Bo Blade handle operation
-
Cannon Head handle operation
-
Probe installation and selection
-
Basic treatment-parameter adjustment
-
Facial and neck treatment protocols
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completing the supplied equipment training.
Training supports machine familiarization but does not replace anatomy training, professional qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Control system
-
Original Dual-Bo Blade handle
-
Original Cannon Head handle
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original components
Probes and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal probe depletion or wear
-
Incorrect probe installation
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This machine is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be appropriate for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Energy must not be applied directly over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Thermal Face Lift Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their facial treatment services
Although the machine has a compact desktop design, it is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine?
Two Dedicated Treatment Handles
The Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head provide complementary energy-delivery formats for different facial zones.
Three Treatment Depths
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm probes support customized professional protocols.
Face and Neck Applications
Develop treatments for facial firming, jawline definition, texture refinement and suitable neck areas.
Manufacturer-Reported Evaluation Data
The supplied assessment figures provide reference information for pore appearance, jawline, brightness, firmness and fine-line outcomes.
Compact Desktop Design
The approximately 19 kg system is easier to position than a large floor-standing platform.
Professional Training Included
Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Technical assistance and a three-year limited professional warranty support your equipment investment.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the two handles?
The Dual-Bo Blade handle provides a broader blade-style treatment format. The Cannon Head handle supports more focused-point energy delivery for targeted areas.
What do the three probe depths do?
The 1.5 mm probe supports superficial facial protocols, the 3.0 mm probe supports mid-depth treatments, and the 4.5 mm probe is intended for deeper facial applications on appropriately selected areas.
Are the published percentages clinically verified?
The percentages supplied with the product should be described as manufacturer-reported evaluation data unless a complete independent clinical study is available.
Is this machine suitable for the eye area?
Only appropriate areas around the eyes may be treated by a trained professional using the correct probe and parameters. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid.
How long does a treatment take?
Treatment time depends on the selected area, handle and protocol. A targeted treatment may be shorter than a complete facial session.
Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early firming response, while collagen-remodeling effects may develop progressively. Timing and results vary between individuals.
Is treatment completely painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Clients may feel warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort depending on the area and energy setting.
Is there any downtime?
Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, swelling or sensitivity may occur.
Is the machine safe for every skin type?
Suitability depends on the client’s skin condition, medical history, treatment area and selected parameters. A consultation and contraindication assessment are required.
Is this a home-use machine?
No. This is professional aesthetic equipment intended for trained operators.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Probes, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Upgrade Your Professional Facial Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine combines:
-
Dual-Bo Blade treatment technology
-
Cannon Head focused treatment technology
-
Three probe depths from 1.5 mm to 4.5 mm
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
De la $1,349.00
Professional Portable HIFU Facial System
Three Cartridge Depths for Facial Firming and Contour Refinement
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Anti-Aging Machine is a professional focused-ultrasound system developed for non-surgical facial and neck treatments.
Three interchangeable cartridge depths—1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm—allow trained operators to create structured protocols for different facial tissue layers and approved treatment areas.
A large 19-inch display provides access to treatment controls, parameter settings and facial-area guidance. Its floor-standing design, metal chassis and approximately 25 kg weight make it more compact than many full-size professional HIFU platforms.
Three cartridge depths | 19-inch display | 180 W rated power | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Cartridge Depths
1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Applications
The 1.5 mm cartridge is intended for suitable superficial facial areas.
Potential professional applications include:
-
Superficial skin-firming protocols
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Skin-texture refinement
-
Selected areas of the forehead and cheeks
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
The 1.5 mm cartridge should not be marketed as permanently shrinking pores or removing wrinkles.
3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Facial Applications
The 3.0 mm cartridge supports professionally planned treatment within suitable mid-depth facial and neck tissue.
Potential applications include:
-
Facial skin firming
-
Cheek treatments
-
Lower-face contour refinement
-
Suitable neck areas
-
Improvement in the appearance of skin laxity
4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Applications
The 4.5 mm cartridge is designed for appropriately selected deeper facial areas.
Potential applications include:
-
Lower-face firming
-
Jawline definition
-
Submental-area protocols
-
Suitable neck treatments
-
Deeper facial contour-refinement programs
The 4.5 mm cartridge does not build or tighten muscle like an exercise device. Focused ultrasound creates controlled focal effects within selected tissue.
How Focused Ultrasound Works
The machine delivers ultrasound energy to a defined focal depth beneath the skin’s surface.
At the focal point, the energy creates controlled thermal and mechanical effects. When delivered correctly, this response may support gradual tissue remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin firmness.
HIFU does not:
-
Remove skin or tissue
-
Produce a surgical facelift
-
Permanently eliminate wrinkles
-
Guarantee double-chin removal
-
Permanently shrink pores
-
Strengthen facial muscles
-
Produce identical results in every client
Individual outcomes depend on age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response.
Professional Facial Applications
| Treatment category | Typical area | Suitable cartridge |
|---|---|---|
| Superficial facial firming | Forehead and cheeks | 1.5 mm |
| Fine-line appearance | Suitable facial areas | 1.5 mm |
| Cheek contour refinement | Cheeks and mid-face | 3.0 mm |
| Lower-face firming | Lower face | 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm |
| Jawline definition | Jawline | 4.5 mm |
| Submental treatment | Suitable area under the chin | 4.5 mm |
| Neck firming | Approved neck areas | 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm |
The cartridge must be selected according to anatomy, tissue thickness and professional training. A deeper cartridge is not automatically more effective.
Large 19-Inch Treatment Display
The system includes a 19-inch HD display designed to provide convenient access to:
-
Treatment-area diagrams
-
Parameter selection
-
Cartridge information
-
Treatment settings
-
Operating status
-
Protocol guidance
The display may support facial mapping through diagrams or software guidance.
It should not be described as providing real-time visualization of nerves, vessels or tissue layers unless the machine includes a separate diagnostic-ultrasound imaging system.
Facial mapping software does not replace anatomical knowledge or professional treatment planning.
Professional Treatment Planning
Full-Face Firming
Use the appropriate cartridge depths to develop a structured protocol for suitable forehead, cheek and lower-face areas.
Jawline and Lower-Face Contouring
The 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges may support professionally planned treatment of appropriate lower-face areas.
Submental-Area Treatment
The 4.5 mm cartridge may be used on suitable tissue beneath the chin after confirming adequate tissue depth and excluding prohibited structures.
It should not be described as guaranteed double-chin removal.
Neck Treatments
Selected neck areas may be treated by a trained operator. Energy must not be delivered over the thyroid, trachea, major blood vessels or other prohibited structures.
Fine-Line and Texture Protocols
The shallower cartridge may support improvement in the appearance of suitable superficial concerns. It should not be represented as resurfacing the skin or removing wrinkles.
Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Portable HIFU Machine should not be advertised as providing:
-
Guaranteed immediate lifting
-
Surgical-facelift results
-
Permanent wrinkle removal
-
Nasolabial-fold elimination
-
Guaranteed double-chin removal
-
Permanent pore reduction
-
Zero thermal-damage risk
-
Pain-free treatment for every client
-
Zero downtime
-
Safety for every skin type or medical condition
-
Guaranteed collagen regeneration
-
Household or unsupervised home use
Focused ultrasound is professional aesthetic technology with real risks when used incorrectly.
Compact Floor-Standing Design
The system combines a large display with a relatively compact vertical housing.
Key design characteristics include:
-
19-inch HD display
-
Metal chassis
-
ABS exterior components
-
Three interchangeable cartridges
-
Professional floor-standing format
-
Approximately 25 kg net weight
-
180 W rated power
-
Compact dimensions for a professional treatment room
The machine should be positioned on a level surface with sufficient clearance and ventilation.
Although the system can be moved between treatment rooms, it should not be described as a handheld or consumer-portable device.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, previous aesthetic treatments, tissue condition and contraindications.
2. Treatment Mapping
Suitable treatment zones and prohibited anatomical areas are identified and marked.
3. Cartridge Selection
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm cartridge is selected according to the treatment area and tissue depth.
4. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed, and an appropriate ultrasound coupling gel is applied.
5. Parameter Selection
Energy, line spacing, treatment pattern and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol.
6. Test Delivery
A test line or lower-energy application may be performed where required to evaluate client comfort and tissue response.
7. Controlled Treatment
The operator maintains full contact and actively controls the handpiece throughout the treatment.
8. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and suitable aftercare instructions are provided.
Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling, numbness or discomfort may occur.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Anti-Aging Machine |
| Product type | Professional focused-ultrasound aesthetic system |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Treatment cartridges | Three |
| Cartridge depths | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Display | 19-inch HD control display |
| Facial guidance | Software-based facial-area mapping |
| Rated power | 180 W |
| Electrical frequency | 50 Hz |
| Construction | Metal chassis with ABS exterior components |
| Machine dimensions | 46 × 25 × 90 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 25 kg |
| Intended treatment areas | Approved areas of the face, jawline, submental region and neck |
| Intended users | Trained professional operators |
| Warranty | Three-year limited professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and remote technical assistance |
The 50 Hz specification refers to the electrical power frequency. The ultrasound frequency must be listed separately if provided in the manufacturer’s technical documentation.
The introductory draft listed 21 kg, while the technical table listed 25 kg. This final version uses the more formal technical-table value of approximately 25 kg.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Portable HIFU control system
-
One professional treatment handpiece
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required handpiece connections
-
Starter ultrasound coupling gel
Treatment Cartridges
-
One 1.5 mm cartridge
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Cartridge installation training
-
Facial treatment guidance
-
Treatment-area mapping guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
Machine installation
-
Display navigation
-
Handpiece operation
-
Cartridge installation
-
Cartridge-depth selection
-
Facial treatment mapping
-
Prohibited anatomical zones
-
Basic parameter selection
-
Coupling-gel application
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace anatomy education, professional aesthetic qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Display and control system
-
Original treatment handpiece
-
Handpiece connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Damage caused by dropping the handpiece
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Incorrect cartridge installation
-
Operation without sufficient coupling gel
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
The Portable HIFU Machine is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active electronic implants
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Open wounds or active infection
-
Severe skin disease in the treatment area
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Facial implants or lifting threads
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
Prohibited Treatment Areas
Focused ultrasound must not be applied directly over:
-
Eyes or eyelids
-
Thyroid
-
Trachea
-
Major nerves
-
Large blood vessels
-
Bone surfaces
-
Other areas prohibited by the device instructions
Incorrect depth, energy or placement can cause thermal or mechanical tissue injury.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Portable HIFU Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine?
Three Essential Facial Depths
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges support superficial, mid-depth and deeper facial protocols.
Large Control Display
The 19-inch interface provides convenient access to treatment settings and facial-area guidance.
Compact Professional Format
Its vertical design and approximately 25 kg weight require less space than many larger HIFU platforms.
Universal Facial Applications
Develop professional protocols for suitable face, jawline, submental and neck areas.
Professional Training
Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included.
Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited professional warranty and remote technical assistance.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the three cartridges?
The 1.5 mm cartridge supports superficial facial protocols, the 3.0 mm cartridge supports mid-depth treatments, and the 4.5 mm cartridge is intended for deeper applications on suitable facial and neck areas.
Can it remove a double chin?
The 4.5 mm cartridge may support contour refinement in an appropriately selected submental area. Guaranteed fat removal or complete double-chin elimination should not be claimed.
Can it treat nasolabial folds?
Treatment may improve surrounding skin firmness, but complete elimination of nasolabial folds should not be promised.
Can the system be used around the eyes?
Only appropriate areas around the eyes may be treated by a trained operator. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid.
Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early change in firmness. Tissue-remodeling responses may develop progressively over time, and results vary.
Is treatment painless?
Client experience varies. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur.
Is there any downtime?
Some clients may continue normal activities shortly afterward, but temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur.
Can this machine be used at home?
No. It is professional HIFU equipment and should only be operated by an appropriately trained person.
What does 50 Hz mean?
It is the electrical input frequency, not the frequency of the ultrasound treatment energy.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridge depletion, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Add Professional HIFU Treatments to Your Service Menu
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine combines:
-
Three professional cartridge depths
-
A 19-inch treatment display
-
Facial-area mapping guidance
-
A compact floor-standing design
-
Professional training and technical support
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$2,399.00
Professional 2-in-1 Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation and Roller Massage System
Dual-Function Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Body Massage
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Inner Roller System combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical roller massage in one professional platform.
Two electromagnetic applicators support controlled muscle-contraction programs, while two Inner Ball Roller handles provide mechanical massage for selected body areas.
A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen and four dedicated handles allow trained operators to create separate muscle-stimulation and massage services using one system.
Two technologies | Four treatment handles | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies in One System
Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
The system includes two electromagnetic applicators designed to stimulate repeated muscle contractions.
According to the supplied specification, the system provides a peak magnetic-field output of up to 7 Tesla at the applicator.
Potential professional applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle-stimulation programs
-
Buttock muscle-stimulation programs
-
Selected thigh applications
-
Selected arm applications
-
Muscle-tone and firmness programs
-
Professionally supervised body-sculpting services
Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the applicator. The 7 T figure should not be interpreted as meaning that 7 T reaches every tissue within the stated 18 cm range.
Inner Ball Roller Massage
The system includes two mechanical Inner Ball Roller handles.
These handles provide controlled rolling massage over selected body areas and may support:
-
Professional body massage
-
Temporary improvement in cellulite appearance
-
Temporary improvement in the appearance of uneven skin texture
-
Relaxation of suitable soft-tissue areas
-
Body-contouring massage programs
-
Pre- or post-treatment massage where appropriate
Mechanical roller massage does not permanently break up cellulite deposits, remove fat or guarantee skin tightening.
Four Dedicated Treatment Handles
The system includes:
-
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators
-
Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles
Each handle type has a separate purpose.
| Handle type | Quantity | Primary function |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic applicator | 2 | Controlled muscle stimulation |
| Inner Ball Roller handle | 2 | Mechanical rolling massage |
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity in nearby nerves and muscles.
This stimulation produces repeated involuntary muscle contractions within the selected area.
Clients may experience:
-
Strong muscle contractions
-
Pulsing or tapping sensations
-
Muscle fatigue
-
Temporary soreness
-
Temporary cramping
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation may support a firmer or more toned appearance, but results differ between individuals and may require ongoing sessions to maintain.
Understanding the 7-Tesla Specification
The supplied product information lists:
-
Peak magnetic-field output: up to 7 T
-
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm
The 7 T figure refers to peak output at or near the treatment applicator. Magnetic-field intensity decreases as distance from the applicator increases.
Treatment response depends on:
-
Applicator placement
-
Distance from the applicator
-
Selected energy level
-
Pulse parameters
-
Treatment duration
-
Target anatomy
-
Individual client response
Mechanical Inner Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handle applies controlled mechanical pressure and movement to the skin and underlying soft tissue.
Mechanical massage may temporarily affect the appearance of cellulite by:
-
Redistributing superficial fluid
-
Providing temporary tissue compression
-
Supporting massage-related circulation
-
Temporarily smoothing the appearance of uneven skin
The roller should not be used with excessive pressure or over areas with contraindications.
Professional Body Applications
| Treatment area | Electromagnetic stimulation | Roller massage |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Suitable according to protocol | Suitable |
| Buttocks | Suitable according to protocol | Suitable |
| Thighs | Suitable according to protocol | Suitable |
| Upper arms | Selected protocols | Suitable |
| Flanks | Limited muscle application | Suitable |
| Back | Only approved muscle areas | Suitable soft-tissue areas |
| Calves | Selected protocols | Suitable with screening |
The machine should not be used over the head, chest, heart, genitals or other prohibited anatomical areas.
Build Two Professional Service Categories
Muscle-Tone Programs
Use the electromagnetic applicators for professionally supervised sessions focused on the abdomen, buttocks or other approved muscle groups.
Roller Massage Programs
Use the Inner Ball Roller handles for massage and temporary improvement in the appearance of cellulite or uneven skin texture.
Combination Body Programs
Qualified operators may include both technologies within a structured body-service plan where appropriate.
The two technologies should not automatically be applied simultaneously or described as producing guaranteed combined results.
Maintenance Services
Because aesthetic outcomes may be temporary, some clients may choose periodic maintenance sessions based on their individual response.
Claims That Should Not Be Made
This system should not be advertised as guaranteeing:
-
Permanent muscle growth
-
Permanent cellulite removal
-
Fat-cell destruction
-
Weight loss
-
Treatment of obesity
-
Tightening of all loose skin
-
Treatment of osteoarthritis
-
Treatment of spinal disorders
-
Accelerated surgical recovery
-
Cure of chronic pain
-
Healing of sports injuries
-
Permanent circulation improvement
-
Results equivalent to exercise
-
Safety for every client
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s goals, medical history, implanted devices, previous surgery and contraindications.
2. Technology Selection
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation, roller massage or a professionally justified sequence is selected.
3. Treatment-Area Assessment
The operator confirms that the area has sufficient healthy tissue and is suitable for the selected handle.
4. Applicator Placement
Electromagnetic applicators are secured over the approved muscle group, or the roller handle is prepared for manual application.
5. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the available intensity, treatment mode and session time according to the client’s condition and tolerance.
6. Controlled Treatment
Client comfort, muscle response, applicator position and skin condition are monitored throughout the session.
7. Post-Treatment Review
The treatment area is assessed, and suitable aftercare guidance is provided.
Temporary muscle soreness, cramping, tenderness, redness or bruising may occur.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 2-in-1 body-treatment system |
| Included technologies | Electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage |
| Total treatment handles | Four |
| Electromagnetic applicators | Two |
| Inner Ball Roller handles | Two |
| Peak magnetic-field output | Up to 7 T at the applicator |
| Manufacturer-stated maximum reach | Up to 18 cm |
| Display | 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Input voltage | AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz |
| Net weight | Approximately 40 kg |
| Package dimensions | 66 × 60 × 49 cm |
| Typical session setting | Approximately 10–20 minutes per area, protocol dependent |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
| Support | Remote technical support and professional training |
Package dimensions should not be presented as the installed machine dimensions unless confirmed separately.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One 2-in-1 touchscreen control system
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required handle-connection components
Electromagnetic Accessories
-
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators
-
Applicator straps or positioning accessories
-
Flexible support components, where included
Roller Massage Accessories
-
Two Inner Ball Roller handles
-
Handle connection cables
-
Required massage accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Electromagnetic applicator training
-
Roller massage training
-
Client-screening guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
Machine installation
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Electromagnetic applicator placement
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Intensity adjustment
-
Roller handle operation
-
Appropriate massage pressure
-
Client screening
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional aesthetic, physiotherapy or medical qualifications required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Roller System is supported by a three-year limited warranty.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original electromagnetic applicators
-
Original Inner Ball Roller handles
-
Handle connectors
-
Flexible support components
-
Other eligible original parts
Roller surfaces, straps and other consumable or wear components may have separate coverage terms.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Excessive pressure applied to roller components
-
Normal strap or roller wear
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
Electromagnetic Treatment Contraindications
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance for clients with:
-
Pacemakers
-
Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators
-
Neurostimulators
-
Medication pumps
-
Cochlear implants
-
Other active electronic implants
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment field
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active cancer
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Significant cardiovascular conditions
-
Uncontrolled seizure disorders
-
Other contraindications listed in the manual
Roller Massage Contraindications
Roller massage may be unsuitable over areas with:
-
Open wounds
-
Active infection
-
Significant inflammation
-
Varicose veins
-
Thrombosis or suspected blood clots
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Fragile or damaged skin
-
Recent surgery
-
Unexplained swelling
-
Pressure or vibration urticaria
-
Other contraindications listed in the manual
General Precautions
-
Remove phones, watches, cards and metallic objects from the magnetic treatment field.
-
Do not position magnetic applicators over the head, chest, heart or prohibited areas.
-
Monitor strong muscle contractions carefully.
-
Do not leave clients unattended during high-intensity treatment.
-
Clean roller handles between clients.
-
Stop treatment if unusual pain, dizziness, numbness or skin injury occurs.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained when suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The 2-in-1 system is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Fitness and wellness centers with qualified operators
-
Appropriately trained independent practitioners
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This 2-in-1 System?
Two Complementary Technologies
Combine electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage within one professional platform.
Four Dedicated Handles
Two magnetic applicators and two roller handles support flexible body-treatment workflows.
Dual-Area Muscle Stimulation
The two electromagnetic applicators can support treatment of two approved areas according to the selected protocol.
Professional Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handles provide controlled mechanical massage and may temporarily improve cellulite appearance.
High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak output of up to 7 T at the applicator.
Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, remote assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What makes this a 2-in-1 system?
The machine combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical Inner Ball Roller massage.
Do the roller handles deliver 7 T magnetic energy?
The supplied information does not clearly establish that the roller handles deliver magnetic energy. The 7 T specification should be applied to the electromagnetic applicators unless the technical documentation states otherwise.
Can electromagnetic stimulation build muscle?
Repeated magnetic stimulation can produce muscle contractions and may improve muscle tone or firmness. Results vary.
Can both technologies be used during one appointment?
A qualified operator may include both technologies in a structured plan when appropriate. Simultaneous use should only occur if permitted by the operating instructions.
Is the treatment painless?
Electromagnetic stimulation causes strong muscle contractions and may lead to soreness or cramping. Roller massage may cause pressure, tenderness or bruising.
Can clients remain clothed?
Electromagnetic treatment may be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing. Roller massage generally requires direct access to the selected body area according to the treatment protocol.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Consumables, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
Expand Your Body-Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 System combines:
-
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators
-
Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles
-
A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Up to 7 T peak magnetic output
-
International voltage compatibility
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$2,539.00
Professional 3-in-1 TECAR, Acoustic-Wave and EMS System
Three Complementary Physiotherapy Modalities in One Platform
The Smart Tecar Wave integrates TECAR capacitive and resistive energy transfer, acoustic-wave therapy and electrical muscle stimulation within one professional system.
Dedicated handpieces and accessories allow qualified practitioners to use each modality independently according to the patient’s assessment and treatment plan.
The platform includes CET and RET TECAR handles, seven acoustic-wave applicators, EMS electrodes and vacuum-assisted EMS cups, providing flexible options for physiotherapy, sports rehabilitation and professionally supervised musculoskeletal applications.
Three modalities | CET and RET modes | Seven acoustic applicators | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Treatment Modalities
TECAR Therapy
TECAR uses radiofrequency energy between 300 and 450 kHz to produce controlled energy transfer within tissue.
The system includes two electrode formats:
-
CET — Capacitive Energy Transfer
-
RET — Resistive Energy Transfer
TECAR treatment may produce thermal or non-thermal effects depending on the selected settings, treatment technique and tissue characteristics.
Acoustic-Wave Therapy
The acoustic-wave module provides adjustable output from 5–200 mJ and a selectable frequency from 1–18 Hz.
Seven interchangeable applicators allow the practitioner to adapt surface contact to different professionally assessed treatment areas.
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
The EMS module delivers controlled electrical pulses at frequencies from 1–30 Hz.
It includes:
-
Reusable EMS electrode pads
-
Adjustable intensity from levels 1–20
-
Vacuum-assisted EMS cups
-
Multiple accessory sizes
-
Hands-free electrode placement
EMS can support selected professional programs involving muscle activation, neuromuscular re-education and rehabilitation.
CET and RET TECAR Modes
CET — Capacitive Energy Transfer
CET uses an insulated electrode to transfer energy through tissue.
It is generally associated with tissues containing relatively more water and electrolytes, such as:
-
Superficial muscle
-
Fascia
-
Selected soft-tissue areas
The system includes CET electrodes in:
-
20 mm
-
40 mm
-
60 mm
RET — Resistive Energy Transfer
RET uses an uninsulated electrode and is generally associated with tissues offering greater electrical resistance.
It may be incorporated into professional protocols concerning:
-
Tendon regions
-
Ligament areas
-
Joint-adjacent tissue
-
Denser connective tissue
-
Other professionally assessed structures
The system includes RET electrodes in:
-
20 mm
-
40 mm
-
60 mm
CET should not simply be described as “superficial,” nor RET as directly heating bones. Energy distribution depends on electrode placement, return-electrode positioning, tissue properties and device settings.
Additional TECAR Accessories
80 mm Fascia Applicator
The broad 80 mm applicator supports energy delivery over larger professionally selected treatment areas.
T-Shaped Handle
The T-shaped handle is designed for broad-area TECAR application and convenient manual movement.
Foot-Pad System
The foot-pad accessory provides an additional return-electrode or treatment configuration for appropriate lower-limb protocols.
Each accessory must be used according to the supplied operating instructions.
Seven Acoustic-Wave Applicators
The acoustic-wave module includes seven interchangeable heads.
Different applicator sizes may support:
-
Localized soft-tissue areas
-
Tendon-adjacent regions
-
Larger muscle groups
-
Broad surface treatment
-
More targeted contact
Applicator shape does not by itself determine treatment depth or establish that the wave is focused.
The practitioner must select the applicator according to the diagnosis, anatomy, device instructions and patient tolerance.
EMS and Vacuum-Assisted EMS
The EMS module delivers electrical stimulation through standard electrode pads or suction-assisted electrode cups.
Standard EMS Electrodes
Reusable pads provide controlled electrical stimulation to appropriately selected muscle groups.
Vacuum-Assisted EMS Cups
The vacuum cups help maintain electrode contact during hands-free operation.
The vacuum function does not provide proven fat reduction or automatically increase muscle growth. It primarily supports electrode positioning and contact.
Adjustable EMS Parameters
-
Intensity levels 1–20
-
Frequency range 1–30 Hz
-
Multiple electrode formats
-
Hands-free operation
Electrical stimulation must not be applied without proper knowledge of electrode placement, current pathways and contraindications.
Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications and professional assessment, the Smart Tecar Wave may be incorporated into programs concerning:
-
Selected musculoskeletal pain
-
Professionally assessed tendon concerns
-
Muscle tension
-
Neuromuscular re-education
-
Muscle activation
-
Sports rehabilitation
-
Post-injury rehabilitation
-
Range-of-motion programs
-
Selected joint-adjacent soft-tissue conditions
-
Other authorized physiotherapy applications
Clinical outcomes vary according to diagnosis, modality, settings and the broader rehabilitation program.
Claims That Should Not Be Made Without Specific Authorization
Smart Tecar Wave should not automatically be promoted for:
-
Erectile-dysfunction treatment
-
Pelvic-floor treatment without appropriate accessories and authorization
-
Permanent fat reduction
-
Cellulite elimination
-
Passive muscle building equivalent to exercise
-
Calcium-deposit elimination
-
Bone or cartilage regeneration
-
Guaranteed tissue healing
-
Treatment of every pain condition
-
Superior results from combining all three modalities
-
Unsupervised home use
Each medical or aesthetic indication must be supported by the device’s applicable certification, instructions and clinical evidence.
How the Three Modalities Work
TECAR Energy Transfer
Radiofrequency current passes between the active electrode and return electrode, producing controlled energy transfer through tissue.
The operator can adjust technique and parameters to create different treatment effects.
Acoustic-Wave Delivery
The acoustic module delivers mechanical pressure pulses through the selected applicator and coupling medium.
Its physical behavior depends on the generator design, energy output and applicator.
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS applies electrical pulses through surface electrodes to stimulate peripheral nerves and muscle contractions.
Treatment effect depends on frequency, intensity, pulse characteristics, electrode placement and individual response.
Flexible Multimodality Workflows
Independent TECAR Treatment
Use CET or RET according to the tissue characteristics and professional treatment objective.
Independent Acoustic-Wave Treatment
Use the acoustic module with the selected applicator for an appropriately diagnosed condition.
Independent EMS Treatment
Use standard electrodes or vacuum-assisted cups for selected neuromuscular applications.
Sequential Treatment Planning
Qualified practitioners may include more than one modality in a rehabilitation plan when clinically justified.
The modalities should not automatically be used simultaneously or described as producing superior outcomes. Sequence, placement and compatibility must follow the user manual and professional training.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, medical history, symptoms, implanted devices, treatment area and contraindications.
2. Modality Selection
TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy or EMS is selected according to the treatment goal.
3. Accessory Selection
The appropriate TECAR electrode, acoustic applicator or EMS electrode is installed.
4. Treatment Preparation
The patient is positioned correctly, and the required coupling medium, return electrode or EMS pads are applied.
5. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, acoustic energy, treatment time and other settings are adjusted according to the professional protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The practitioner monitors patient comfort, skin response, muscle contractions and device performance.
7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Settings and patient response are documented, and further treatment is scheduled only when appropriate.
Possible temporary responses include warmth, redness, tenderness, muscle fatigue, soreness, bruising or skin irritation.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Smart Tecar Wave |
| Product type | Professional 3-in-1 physiotherapy system |
| Included modalities | TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy and EMS |
| TECAR modes | CET and RET |
| TECAR frequency | 300–450 kHz |
| CET electrode sizes | 20 mm, 40 mm and 60 mm |
| RET electrode sizes | 20 mm, 40 mm and 60 mm |
| Additional TECAR accessories | 80 mm fascia applicator, T-shaped handle and foot-pad system |
| Acoustic-wave output | 5–200 mJ |
| Acoustic-wave frequency | 1–18 Hz |
| Acoustic applicators | Seven |
| EMS intensity | Levels 1–20 |
| EMS frequency | 1–30 Hz |
| EMS accessories | Standard electrodes and vacuum-assisted cups |
| Input voltage | AC 110–240 V |
| Net weight | Approximately 33 kg |
| Package dimensions | 513 × 505 × 455 mm |
| Certifications | CE certified with applicable ISO documentation |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Support | Remote after-sales assistance |
Package dimensions should not be described as the machine’s installed dimensions unless confirmed separately.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Smart Tecar Wave control system
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required connection cables
-
Starter treatment consumables, where applicable
TECAR Accessories
-
One RET handle
-
20 mm RET electrode
-
40 mm RET electrode
-
60 mm RET electrode
-
One CET handle
-
20 mm CET electrode
-
40 mm CET electrode
-
60 mm CET electrode
-
80 mm fascia applicator
-
T-shaped treatment handle
-
Foot-pad system
-
Return electrode and connection components
Acoustic-Wave Accessories
-
One acoustic-wave handpiece
-
Seven interchangeable applicator heads
-
Applicator-removal components
-
Starter coupling gel
EMS Accessories
-
Standard EMS electrode pads
-
Vacuum-assisted EMS cups
-
EMS connection cables
-
Replacement electrode set, where included
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
Applicable ISO documentation
-
Installation guidance
-
Operating instructions for all three modalities
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final accessory quantities should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE-Certified Professional System
The Smart Tecar Wave comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
Applicable ISO Documentation
These documents are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
The system must only be marketed and used for the indications covered by its applicable certification and local regulatory status.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
Machine installation
-
TECAR CET and RET operation
-
Electrode and return-plate placement
-
Acoustic-wave handpiece operation
-
Applicator selection
-
EMS electrode placement
-
Vacuum-cup operation
-
Basic parameter adjustment
-
Patient screening
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Smart Tecar Wave is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and remote after-sales assistance.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Display and control interface
-
Original TECAR handles
-
Original acoustic-wave handpiece
-
Original EMS and vacuum components
-
Original connectors
-
Other eligible machine parts
Electrodes, applicators, pads, seals and other wear components may have separate coverage terms.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Damage caused by dropping a handpiece
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Liquid entering electrical components
-
Normal electrode, pad or applicator wear
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Contraindications and Safety Precautions
This system is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for patients with:
-
Pacemakers
-
Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators
-
Neurostimulators or medication pumps
-
Other active electronic implants
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active cancer in the treatment area
-
Open wounds or active infection
-
Significant bleeding disorders
-
Thrombosis
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Impaired sensation
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Recent surgery
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
TECAR Precautions
The RF current pathway must be planned carefully. Avoid treatment over active implants, prohibited anatomical areas or compromised skin.
Acoustic-Wave Precautions
Do not apply acoustic energy over vulnerable organs, lung tissue, major blood vessels, the brain, spinal structures or other prohibited areas.
EMS Precautions
Electrode placement must not create a current pathway across the chest or near active implanted devices. Do not apply stimulation over the anterior neck, head or other prohibited areas.
This is not an exhaustive list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
Smart Tecar Wave is suitable for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine practices
-
Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics
-
Licensed multidisciplinary centers
-
Qualified physical therapists
-
Appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose Smart Tecar Wave?
Three Modalities in One Platform
Combine TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy and EMS without purchasing three separate control systems.
CET and RET Operation
Use capacitive and resistive electrode formats for different tissue characteristics and professional protocols.
Comprehensive Accessory Package
Multiple TECAR electrodes, seven acoustic applicators and standard or vacuum-assisted EMS options are included.
Adjustable Parameters
Select TECAR frequency, acoustic output and EMS intensity according to the treatment plan.
Hands-Free EMS Options
Vacuum-assisted cups support stable electrode placement during supervised treatment.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training and a three-year limited parts warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “3-in-1” mean?
Smart Tecar Wave combines TECAR capacitive and resistive energy transfer, acoustic-wave therapy and electrical muscle stimulation.
What is the difference between CET and RET?
CET uses an insulated electrode and is generally associated with water-rich soft tissue. RET uses an uninsulated electrode and is generally associated with tissues offering greater electrical resistance.
Can all three modalities be used simultaneously?
They should only be combined or used sequentially when the device instructions and professional treatment plan permit it. Simultaneous use should not be assumed to be safe or superior.
Does it provide pelvic-floor therapy?
Surface EMS may support selected professional muscle-stimulation programs, but a specific pelvic-floor indication should not be claimed without appropriate accessories, protocols and authorization.
Does TECAR directly heat bones?
No. RET is associated with higher-resistance tissues, but it should not be described as selectively heating or regenerating bone.
Is treatment painless?
Patient experience varies. TECAR may create warmth, acoustic-wave treatment can be uncomfortable, and EMS causes muscle contractions or tingling.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications.
Is the machine CE certified?
Yes. Smart Tecar Wave comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Consumables, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
Expand Your Professional Physiotherapy Services
Smart Tecar Wave combines:
-
CET and RET TECAR therapy
-
Adjustable acoustic-wave technology
-
Standard and vacuum-assisted EMS
-
A complete professional accessory package
-
International voltage compatibility
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$2,299.00
Professional Radial Pressure-Wave and Ultrasound System
Two Physiotherapy Modalities in One Compact Platform
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology with 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound in one professional physiotherapy system.
Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads, touchscreen controls and separate treatment modes provide qualified practitioners with flexibility for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and rehabilitation applications.
The compact system integrates two established modalities without requiring two separate control units.
Two modalities | 12 applicator heads | Touchscreen control | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Treatment Modalities
Pneumatic Radial Pressure-Wave Therapy
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected applicator, producing acoustic pressure waves that spread radially into the treatment area.
Key features include:
-
Adjustable pressure up to 6 bar
-
Twelve interchangeable applicator heads
-
Applicator sizes from D6 to D25
-
Flat, targeted-contact and radial applicator designs
-
Touchscreen body-area menus
-
Professional handpiece construction
Therapeutic Ultrasound
The ultrasound handpiece operates at 1 MHz and delivers mechanical vibration through an appropriate coupling gel.
Therapeutic ultrasound can be used in continuous or pulsed formats where supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol.
Potential professional applications may include:
-
Selected soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Tissue-heating protocols
-
Preparation for stretching or mobility work
-
Other professionally assessed musculoskeletal applications
Treatment outcomes depend on intensity, duration, duty cycle, treatment area and individual response.
Radial Pressure Waves Versus Focused Shockwaves
Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology.
| Radial pressure waves | Focused shockwaves |
|---|---|
| Generated by a projectile striking an applicator | Generated through electrohydraulic, electromagnetic or piezoelectric mechanisms |
| Highest pressure is generally near the applicator surface | Energy is concentrated at a defined focal point |
| Pressure spreads radially from the applicator | Energy is focused at a selected depth |
| Commonly described using bar and Hz | Commonly described using energy-flux density |
| Often used for professionally assessed soft-tissue applications | Used for selected focused clinical applications |
An applicator described as a “focus head” provides more localized contact, but it does not turn the pneumatic radial system into a true focused shockwave generator.
Twelve Interchangeable Applicator Heads
The system includes twelve pressure-wave applicator heads ranging from D6 to D25.
Flat Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure over a relatively broad contact area.
Common professional uses may include:
-
Larger muscle groups
-
Broader soft-tissue areas
-
Surface-oriented protocols
Targeted-Contact Applicators
Designed to provide more localized contact over an appropriately selected treatment area.
These heads do not create a true focused shockwave field.
Radial Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure across wider anatomical areas according to the supplied operating protocol.
D6–D25 Size Range
Smaller applicators may suit localized areas, while larger applicators provide broader contact.
Applicator selection must be based on anatomy, diagnosis, patient tolerance and professional training.
Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications, local regulations and clinical assessment, the Ultrashock may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning:
-
Plantar-fascia pain
-
Achilles-tendon concerns
-
Patellar-tendon concerns
-
Lateral or medial elbow tendinopathy
-
Selected shoulder-tendon conditions
-
Myofascial trigger points
-
Muscle tension
-
Selected sports-related soft-tissue conditions
-
Professionally assessed rehabilitation programs
Evidence and protocols vary between conditions. The system should not be represented as treating virtually every pain, joint, tendon or sports injury.
Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Ultrashock should not be promoted as guaranteeing:
-
Calcium-deposit removal
-
New blood-vessel formation
-
Tissue regeneration
-
Accelerated healing
-
Elimination of inflammation
-
Permanent pain relief
-
Faster return to sport
-
Prevention of future injuries
-
Superior outcomes from combining both modalities
-
Suitability for every musculoskeletal condition
Clinical outcomes depend on diagnosis, treatment parameters, patient condition and the broader rehabilitation plan.
Flexible Dual-Modality Workflow
Radial Pressure-Wave Treatment
The practitioner selects an applicator and adjusts the available pressure, frequency and impact settings according to the treatment plan.
Therapeutic-Ultrasound Treatment
The 1 MHz ultrasound handpiece is used with an appropriate coupling gel and professionally selected treatment parameters.
Sequential Treatment Planning
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities within the same rehabilitation plan when clinically appropriate.
The modalities should not automatically be combined on the same area or represented as producing superior results without supporting evidence.
Independent Use
Either modality can be used independently according to the patient assessment and treatment objective.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, medical history, symptoms, treatment area and contraindications.
2. Modality Selection
Radial pressure-wave therapy, therapeutic ultrasound or a professionally justified sequence is selected.
3. Applicator Preparation
The appropriate pressure-wave head or ultrasound handpiece is inspected and installed.
4. Treatment-Area Preparation
The patient is positioned correctly, and the recommended coupling gel is applied.
5. Parameter Selection
Pressure, frequency, impact count, ultrasound intensity and treatment time are selected according to the professional protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The modality is applied while the practitioner monitors comfort, tissue response and device operation.
7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Treatment settings and patient response are documented. Further sessions are scheduled only when clinically appropriate.
Temporary discomfort, redness, bruising, swelling or tenderness may occur after pressure-wave treatment. Therapeutic ultrasound risks depend on intensity, duration and treatment location.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Ultrashock |
| Product type | Professional dual-modality physiotherapy system |
| Included modalities | Pneumatic radial pressure waves and therapeutic ultrasound |
| Pressure-wave mechanism | Pneumatic ballistic |
| Maximum pressure | Up to 6 bar |
| Applicator heads | Twelve interchangeable heads |
| Applicator sizes | D6–D25 |
| Applicator styles | Flat, targeted-contact and radial |
| Ultrasound frequency | 1 MHz |
| Control interface | Touchscreen with body-area modes |
| Rated power | 250 W |
| Voltage options | 110 V or 220 V |
| Package dimensions | 58 × 46 × 42 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 28 kg |
| Certifications | CE certified with applicable ISO documentation |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Support | Remote after-sales support |
The package dimensions should not be described as the machine’s installed footprint unless the product dimensions are confirmed separately.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Ultrashock control system
-
One pneumatic radial pressure-wave handpiece
-
One 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece
-
Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicators
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required connection accessories
-
Starter coupling gel, where applicable
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
Applicable ISO documentation
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Radial pressure-wave operating guidance
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operating guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Contraindication-screening guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Professional Training
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Pressure-wave handpiece setup
-
Applicator selection
-
Basic parameter adjustment
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operation
-
Coupling-gel use
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Equipment maintenance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE-Certified Professional System
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
Applicable ISO Documentation
These documents are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
The device must be marketed and used only for the indications covered by its applicable certification and local regulatory status.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
System installation
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Pressure-wave handpiece setup
-
Applicator-head installation
-
Basic pressure and impact adjustment
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operation
-
Patient screening
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Ultrashock is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and remote after-sales assistance.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original pneumatic handpiece
-
Original ultrasound handpiece
-
Internal compressor components
-
Original connectors
-
Other eligible machine parts
Applicators, projectiles, seals, filters and other wear components may have separate warranty terms.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handpiece
-
Normal applicator or projectile wear
-
Filter and seal replacement
-
Liquid entering a handpiece
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Maintenance and Operating Care
Use the Correct Coupling Medium
Apply the recommended gel during radial pressure-wave and ultrasound treatments.
Prevent gel or other liquids from entering the handpieces, connectors or ventilation openings.
Inspect Wear Components
Regularly inspect:
-
Applicator heads
-
Projectile and guide components
-
Seals
-
Filters
-
Handpiece connections
-
Ultrasound treatment surface
Clean After Use
Clean and disinfect external treatment surfaces according to the supplied instructions. Do not immerse electrical handpieces.
Store Correctly
Keep the system in a dry, climate-controlled environment and protect all handpieces from impact.
Contraindications and Safety Precautions
The Ultrashock is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment when the treatment field includes:
-
Active infection
-
Open wounds
-
Malignant tumor
-
A fetus
-
Significant bleeding or coagulation disorder
-
Thrombosis
-
Pacemaker or implanted electronic device
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Lung tissue or other air-containing organs
-
Brain or spinal structures
-
Active growth plates
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
High energy should not be applied directly over vulnerable organs, large blood vessels, major nerves or other prohibited areas.
This is not an exhaustive list. Appropriate examination, diagnosis and medical clearance are required when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Ultrashock is suitable for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine practices
-
Orthopedic rehabilitation facilities
-
Licensed multidisciplinary clinics
-
Qualified physical therapists
-
Appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose Ultrashock?
Two Modalities in One Platform
Combine radial pressure-wave treatment and 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound without purchasing two separate control units.
Twelve Applicator Heads
Choose from D6–D25 applicator sizes for different professionally assessed areas.
Adjustable Pressure
The pneumatic handpiece provides output up to 6 bar.
Touchscreen Operation
Body-area menus help streamline equipment setup while leaving final parameter selection to the practitioner.
International Voltage Options
Select either a 110 V or 220 V configuration for the intended market.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training and a three-year limited parts warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is Ultrashock a focused shockwave machine?
No. Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology.
Does the targeted-contact applicator create focused shockwaves?
No. It provides more localized surface contact but does not create the focal field of a true focused shockwave generator.
What is the second treatment modality?
The system includes a 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece.
Can both modalities be used during one session?
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities when clinically appropriate. They should not automatically be combined for every patient or condition.
Can Ultrashock break down calcifications?
Some shockwave technologies are used in selected calcific conditions, but results depend on the technology, diagnosis and protocol. Guaranteed calcification removal should not be claimed for this radial device.
Does the machine treat every sports injury?
No. Proper diagnosis and patient selection are required. Different injuries require different rehabilitation approaches.
Is treatment painless?
Pressure-wave treatment may produce discomfort, tenderness or temporary bruising. Settings should be adjusted according to clinical needs and patient tolerance.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications.
Is Ultrashock CE approved?
The supplied information confirms CE certification and applicable ISO documentation.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Wear components, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
Add Dual-Modality Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines:
-
Pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology
-
One-megahertz therapeutic ultrasound
-
Twelve interchangeable applicator heads
-
Touchscreen body-area controls
-
A compact professional platform
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$2,829.00
Professional High-Intensity Pulsed Magnetic Therapy System
Dual-Mode Electromagnetic Technology for Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is a professional pulsed electromagnetic therapy system developed for physiotherapy, rehabilitation and appropriately supervised musculoskeletal applications.
With a manufacturer-stated peak magnetic-field strength of 4 Tesla at the applicator coil, two operating modes and a flexible positioning arm, the system supports hands-free treatment workflows in professional clinical environments.
A 10.4-inch touchscreen, integrated water-cooling system and universal voltage compatibility provide convenient operation for qualified physiotherapists and healthcare professionals.
Four-Tesla peak field | Two treatment modes | Hands-free operation | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Magnetic-Therapy Modes
ST Mode — High-Frequency Pulsed Operation
ST Mode provides high-frequency pulsed electromagnetic stimulation with an oscillation frequency of up to 130 kHz according to the supplied specification.
This mode can be incorporated into professionally supervised programs focused on:
-
Selected musculoskeletal conditions
-
Muscle-stimulation protocols
-
Rehabilitation support
-
Selected joint and soft-tissue applications
-
Other uses authorized for the device
MT Mode — 50 Hz Magnetic Operation
MT Mode delivers pulsed magnetic stimulation at 50 Hz.
It provides an alternative operating format for protocols involving:
-
Neuromuscular stimulation
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Selected pain-management programs
-
Rehabilitation support
-
Other professionally assessed applications
The appropriate mode and parameters must be selected according to the client’s diagnosis, treatment area, contraindications and professional protocol.
Understanding the Four-Tesla Specification
The supplied technical information lists:
-
Peak magnetic-field strength at the coil: 4 T
-
Magnetic-field strength at 4 cm: 0.4 T
-
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm
-
Magnetic-field change rate: 92 T/s
The 4 T figure refers to peak output at the applicator coil. Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the coil, as reflected by the stated 0.4 T measurement at 4 cm.
Treatment effect depends on:
-
Distance from the applicator
-
Applicator positioning
-
Pulse waveform
-
Frequency
-
Exposure duration
-
Tissue anatomy
-
Individual response
Non-Contact, Hands-Free Operation
The flexible positioning arm holds the treatment applicator over the selected area during operation.
This provides several workflow advantages:
-
Consistent applicator placement
-
Reduced need for continuous handpiece movement
-
Convenient positioning around larger joints and muscle groups
-
Minimal preparation compared with contact-based modalities
-
No conductive gel required
-
Treatment through suitable non-metallic clothing
-
Easier integration into professional rehabilitation workflows
Hands-free operation does not mean the patient can be left completely unattended. The practitioner should monitor positioning, comfort and system performance throughout treatment.
Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications, professional diagnosis and applicable local regulations, pulsed magnetic therapy may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning:
-
Selected knee, hip, shoulder or elbow concerns
-
Muscular tension or spasm
-
Selected osteoarthritis-related symptoms
-
Rehabilitation following suitable sports injuries
-
Selected chronic musculoskeletal pain
-
Range-of-motion programs
-
Neuromuscular stimulation
-
Post-treatment rehabilitation under professional supervision
-
Other applications authorized for the system
Clinical evidence varies between conditions, devices and protocols. The PM-ST should not be promoted as treating virtually every pain, spinal, tendon, bone or inflammatory condition.
Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Physio Magneto PM-ST should not be advertised as guaranteeing:
-
Cellular re-energization
-
Restoration of cell-membrane potential
-
Increased ATP production
-
Accelerated bone healing
-
Permanent pain relief
-
Elimination of inflammation
-
Reversal of degenerative disease
-
Restoration of damaged spinal tissue
-
Improved circulation in every patient
-
No adverse effects
-
Safety for all age groups or medical conditions
These outcomes require evidence for the exact device, parameters, condition and patient population.
How Pulsed Magnetic Stimulation Works
The applicator coil produces a time-varying magnetic field.
A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity within nearby conductive tissue. Depending on the output, frequency and positioning, this may stimulate peripheral nerves and muscles.
The client may experience:
-
Muscle contractions
-
Twitching
-
Tapping or pulsing sensations
-
Tingling
-
Temporary muscle fatigue
-
Post-treatment soreness
The technology is non-contact and does not use needles or surgical incisions. However, “non-invasive” does not mean risk-free or suitable for every patient.
Build a Professional Rehabilitation Workflow
Joint-Area Protocols
Position the applicator over an appropriately assessed joint area using the flexible support arm.
Large Muscle-Group Stimulation
The high-intensity magnetic field can support professionally controlled stimulation of suitable muscle groups.
Neuromuscular Applications
MT Mode provides a lower-frequency option for selected neuromuscular protocols.
Rehabilitation Programs
The system may be incorporated into a broader rehabilitation plan that includes exercise, manual therapy and other evidence-based interventions.
Monitoring and Reassessment
Treatment progress should be evaluated using appropriate clinical outcome measures rather than relying only on subjective improvement claims.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, symptoms, medical history, implanted devices and contraindications.
2. Treatment Planning
The practitioner selects ST Mode or MT Mode according to the clinical objective and device instructions.
3. Applicator Positioning
The patient is positioned comfortably and all metallic objects are removed from the treatment field. The applicator is secured using the adjustable arm.
4. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, treatment time and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol.
5. Controlled Treatment
Treatment begins while the practitioner monitors patient comfort, muscle response and applicator position.
6. Post-Treatment Assessment
The practitioner checks for discomfort, muscle fatigue, soreness or other responses and documents the session.
7. Follow-Up
Further sessions are scheduled only when appropriate based on the patient’s response and treatment plan.
A universal 10–20-minute protocol or fixed 8–12-session course should not be promised for every condition.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Physio Magneto PM-ST |
| Product type | Professional pulsed magnetic therapy system |
| Technology | High-intensity pulsed electromagnetic stimulation |
| Operating modes | ST Mode and MT Mode |
| Peak field strength at coil | Up to 4 T |
| Field strength at 4 cm | Approximately 0.4 T |
| Manufacturer-stated maximum reach | Up to 18 cm |
| Maximum oscillation frequency | Up to 130 kHz |
| MT Mode frequency | 50 Hz |
| Magnetic-field change rate | 92 T/s |
| Therapeutic-intensity reference | Manufacturer-stated ≥10 mT |
| Display | 10.4-inch touchscreen |
| Applicator support | Flexible hands-free positioning arm |
| Cooling system | Integrated water cooling |
| Water-cooling capacity | 2.5 L |
| Input voltage | AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz |
| Package dimensions | 66 × 60 × 49 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 40 kg |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Technical support | Lifetime remote support |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Physio Magneto PM-ST control system
-
One magnetic-field treatment applicator
-
One flexible positioning arm
-
Integrated water-cooling system
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required connection accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
ST Mode operating guidance
-
MT Mode operating guidance
-
Patient-screening guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Water-cooling maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
Machine installation
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Applicator positioning
-
ST and MT Mode selection
-
Basic parameter adjustment
-
Patient screening
-
Removal of metallic objects
-
Treatment monitoring
-
Water-cooling maintenance
-
Cleaning and storage
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original treatment applicator
-
Flexible positioning arm
-
Water-cooling components
-
Original connectors
-
Other eligible machine parts
Consumable, wear and maintenance components may have separate coverage terms.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper water-cooling maintenance
-
Use of unsuitable cooling liquid
-
Damage caused by dropping the applicator
-
Normal wear of moving or support components
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Contraindications and Safety Precautions
High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields can interact with implanted devices and metallic objects.
The system must not be used without appropriate professional assessment.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance in patients with:
-
Pacemakers
-
Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators
-
Neurostimulators
-
Medication pumps
-
Cochlear implants
-
Other active electronic implants
-
Ferromagnetic implants or metal in the treatment field
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Active cancer in the treatment area
-
Recent bleeding or significant bleeding disorders
-
Uncontrolled seizure disorders
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Impaired sensation
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
Additional Operating Precautions
-
Remove phones, watches, keys, cards and other metallic or electronic objects from the treatment field.
-
Do not position the applicator over the head, eyes or other prohibited areas unless specifically authorized.
-
Confirm implant compatibility before treatment.
-
Monitor the patient for excessive contractions, discomfort, dizziness or other adverse responses.
-
Ensure the applicator is securely positioned before starting.
-
Maintain the water-cooling system according to the supplied instructions.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is suitable for:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine practices
-
Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics
-
Pain-management practices
-
Qualified physical therapists
-
Appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose Physio Magneto PM-ST?
High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil.
Two Operating Modes
Choose between high-frequency ST Mode and 50 Hz MT Mode according to the professional protocol.
Hands-Free Positioning
The flexible arm supports stable applicator placement during supervised treatment.
Non-Contact Operation
Treatment can be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing without conductive gel.
Integrated Water Cooling
The 2.5 L cooling system supports controlled equipment temperature during professional operation.
Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is Physio Magneto PM-ST?
It is a professional high-intensity pulsed magnetic therapy system with two operating modes and a peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil.
Is PM-ST the same as conventional low-intensity PEMF?
No. PM-ST uses substantially higher peak magnetic output than many low-intensity consumer PEMF products. Research on one type of electromagnetic device cannot automatically validate another.
What is the difference between ST Mode and MT Mode?
ST Mode provides higher-frequency pulsed operation up to the machine’s specified maximum. MT Mode operates at 50 Hz for a different stimulation format.
Can patients remain clothed?
The magnetic field can pass through suitable non-metallic clothing. Metallic items, electronic devices and unsuitable garments must be removed from the treatment field.
Is treatment painless?
Patients may experience contractions, twitching, tingling or tapping sensations. Intensity should be adjusted according to professional judgment and patient tolerance.
Is there any downtime?
Many patients may continue normal activities after treatment, but temporary muscle fatigue, soreness or cramping may occur.
Is it safe for patients with pacemakers?
No. High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields may interfere with pacemakers and other active implants. These patients should not be treated unless expressly permitted by the device instructions and relevant medical specialists.
How many sessions are required?
There is no universal treatment course for every condition. Frequency and session number must be determined by a qualified professional.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Accidental damage, misuse, improper cooling maintenance and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Add High-Intensity Magnetic Therapy to Your Practice
The Physio Magneto PM-ST combines:
-
Up to 4 T peak magnetic output
-
ST and MT operating modes
-
Hands-free applicator positioning
-
A 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Integrated water cooling
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$2,449.00
Professional Radial Pressure-Wave and Therapeutic Ultrasound System
Dual-Modality Physiotherapy Technology in a Protective Aluminium Case
The Ultrashock Master combines pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology with 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound in one professional rehabilitation system.
Its 10.4-inch touchscreen provides separate body-area menus for both modalities. Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads, adjustable operating parameters and continuous or pulsed ultrasound modes support customized physiotherapy and rehabilitation workflows.
The complete system is supplied in a protective aluminium case for organized storage and transportation between appropriate professional locations.
Two treatment modalities | 12 applicator heads | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Treatment Modalities
Pneumatic Radial Pressure-Wave Therapy
The radial pressure-wave handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the applicator, generating acoustic pressure waves that spread radially into the tissue.
Adjustable operating parameters include:
-
Pressure from 1–6 bar
-
Frequency from 1–21 Hz
-
Preload from 800–3,000 impacts
-
Twelve interchangeable applicator heads
-
Ten pre-programmed body-area menus
The system produces radial pressure waves rather than focused extracorporeal shockwaves. These technologies have different physical characteristics and should not be treated as interchangeable.
Therapeutic Ultrasound
The second modality delivers therapeutic ultrasound at a frequency of 1 MHz.
The system supports:
-
Adjustable intensity from 0.2–3.0 W/cm²
-
Continuous mode
-
Pulsed modes from 1–10 Hz
-
Adjustable treatment time from 1–60 minutes
-
Ten ultrasound body-area menus
-
Operation with appropriate ultrasound coupling gel
Therapeutic ultrasound parameters must be selected by a qualified professional according to the treatment area, clinical objective and patient assessment.
Radial Pressure Waves Versus Focused Shockwaves
Ultrashock Master uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology.
| Radial pressure waves | Focused shockwaves |
|---|---|
| Generated by a projectile striking an applicator | Generated by electrohydraulic, electromagnetic or piezoelectric mechanisms |
| Highest energy is generally near the applicator surface | Energy is concentrated at a defined focal point |
| Pressure spreads outward in a radial pattern | Energy can be delivered to a selected focal depth |
| Parameters are commonly expressed in bar and Hz | Parameters commonly include energy-flux density |
| Often used for soft-tissue and musculoskeletal applications | Used for selected focused clinical applications |
The machine should be marketed according to its actual radial pressure-wave technology, not as a focused shockwave device.
Professional Musculoskeletal Applications
Subject to diagnosis, professional training, local regulations and the device’s authorized indications, radial pressure-wave or therapeutic-ultrasound protocols may be considered for selected musculoskeletal concerns such as:
-
Plantar-fascia pain
-
Achilles-tendon concerns
-
Patellar-tendon concerns
-
Lateral or medial elbow tendinopathy
-
Selected shoulder-tendon conditions
-
Myofascial trigger points
-
Muscle tension
-
Selected sports-related soft-tissue conditions
-
Other professionally assessed rehabilitation applications
Evidence and recommended treatment methods vary between conditions. The device should not be represented as universally effective for every pain, tendon, joint or soft-tissue disorder.
Applications That Should Not Be Claimed Without Specific Authorization
The Ultrashock Master should not automatically be promoted for:
-
Erectile-dysfunction treatment
-
Peyronie’s plaque or penile-curvature correction
-
Fat reduction
-
Weight loss
-
Permanent cellulite elimination
-
Treatment of every form of back or neck pain
-
Bone treatment requiring focused high-energy shockwaves
-
Guaranteed tissue regeneration
-
Guaranteed inflammation reduction
-
Unsupervised home treatment
Radial pressure waves are not equivalent to the focused low-intensity shockwaves evaluated in most erectile-dysfunction research.
Twelve Interchangeable Applicator Heads
The system includes twelve radial pressure-wave applicator heads in different sizes and shapes.
This allows qualified operators to select an applicator according to:
-
Treatment area
-
Target-tissue size
-
Surface anatomy
-
Desired pressure distribution
-
Patient tolerance
-
Approved clinical protocol
Larger heads may support broader-area treatment, while smaller heads may provide more localized contact.
Applicator choice must follow the user manual and professional training. Applicator size alone does not determine treatment depth or clinical outcome.
Twenty Pre-Programmed Body-Area Menus
The 10.4-inch touchscreen includes:
-
Ten radial pressure-wave menus
-
Ten therapeutic-ultrasound menus
These menus provide convenient starting points for equipment setup and workflow.
Pre-programmed settings do not replace:
-
Clinical diagnosis
-
Physical examination
-
Knowledge of anatomy
-
Contraindication screening
-
Individual parameter adjustment
-
Monitoring during treatment
-
Professional judgment
Operators remain responsible for confirming that each setting is appropriate for the individual patient.
Build a Flexible Rehabilitation Workflow
Radial Pressure-Wave Treatments
Use the pneumatic handpiece with the appropriate applicator for professionally assessed soft-tissue and musculoskeletal applications.
Therapeutic-Ultrasound Treatments
Use the 1 MHz ultrasound handpiece in continuous or pulsed mode according to the treatment goal and clinical protocol.
Sequential Modality Planning
A qualified professional may use both modalities within a broader rehabilitation plan when appropriate.
The modalities should not automatically be applied to the same area or combined solely to claim stronger results. Treatment sequence and parameters must be clinically justified.
Multi-Site Professional Use
The protective aluminium case supports organized storage and transportation between suitable treatment environments.
Operators remain responsible for safe transportation, sanitation, inspection and equipment setup.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s symptoms, history, diagnosis, treatment area and contraindications.
Imaging or additional medical assessment may be necessary for certain conditions.
2. Modality Selection
Radial pressure-wave therapy or therapeutic ultrasound is selected according to the clinical objective.
3. Applicator or Handpiece Preparation
The appropriate pressure-wave head or ultrasound handpiece is inspected and installed.
4. Treatment-Area Preparation
The treatment area is positioned and an appropriate coupling gel is applied where required.
5. Parameter Selection
Pressure, frequency, impact count, ultrasound intensity, pulse mode and treatment time are adjusted according to the approved protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
Treatment is delivered while the practitioner monitors comfort, tissue response and device performance.
7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Parameters and patient response are recorded, and the practitioner determines whether further treatment is appropriate.
Temporary discomfort, redness, bruising, swelling or tenderness may occur after radial pressure-wave treatment. Therapeutic ultrasound risks depend on intensity, duration and treatment location.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | Ultrashock Master |
| Product type | Professional dual-modality physiotherapy system |
| Included modalities | Pneumatic radial pressure waves and therapeutic ultrasound |
| Radial pressure setting | 1–6 bar |
| Radial frequency | 1–21 Hz |
| Adjustable impact count | 800–3,000 impacts |
| Applicator heads | Twelve interchangeable heads |
| Listed projectile-life rating | Up to five million impacts |
| Ultrasound frequency | 1 MHz |
| Ultrasound intensity | 0.2–3.0 W/cm² |
| Ultrasound modes | Continuous and pulsed |
| Ultrasound pulse frequency | 1–10 Hz |
| Treatment-time setting | 1–60 minutes |
| Display | 10.4-inch color touchscreen |
| Pressure-wave menus | Ten body-area menus |
| Ultrasound menus | Ten body-area menus |
| Rated power | 250 W |
| Net weight | Approximately 28 kg |
| Gross weight | Approximately 30 kg |
| Package dimensions | 58 × 46 × 42 cm |
| Transport and storage | Aluminium protective case |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Technical support | Lifetime remote support |
The five-million-impact figure is a manufacturer-stated component rating, not a guarantee that every wear component will operate for five million impacts without maintenance.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Ultrashock Master control system
-
One pneumatic radial pressure-wave handpiece
-
One 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece
-
Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads
-
One power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Required connection accessories
-
Starter coupling gel, where applicable
Transport and Storage
-
One protective aluminium case
-
Organized storage for the machine, handpieces and accessories
-
Protective external shipping carton
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Radial pressure-wave operating guidance
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operating guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Contraindication-screening guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Final accessories and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
System installation
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Pressure-wave handpiece setup
-
Applicator-head selection
-
Pressure, frequency and impact adjustment
-
Therapeutic-ultrasound operation
-
Ultrasound intensity and pulse-mode selection
-
Coupling-gel application
-
Patient screening
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Ultrashock Master is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original pneumatic handpiece
-
Original ultrasound handpiece
-
Internal compressor components
-
Original connectors
-
Other eligible machine parts
Applicators, projectiles, seals, filters and other wear components may have separate coverage terms.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handpiece
-
Normal projectile or applicator wear
-
Filter and seal replacement
-
Damage caused by liquid entering a handpiece
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Maintenance and Operating Care
Coupling Media
Use the coupling gel or lubricant specified for the selected modality.
Do not allow gel or liquid to enter the pressure-wave handpiece, connectors or ventilation openings.
Wear-Component Inspection
Inspect the projectile, internal guide components, applicators, seals and connections regularly.
Although the listed projectile-life rating is up to five million impacts, other internal wear components may require inspection or replacement earlier.
Filter-Cup Maintenance
Follow the supplied manual when draining or cleaning the pneumatic filter cup. Disconnect the system from power before performing applicable maintenance.
Handpiece Inspection
Check each applicator and handpiece for cracks, looseness, unusual vibration or performance changes before use.
Storage
Keep the system and aluminium case in a clean, dry and climate-controlled environment.
Contraindications and Safety Precautions
The Ultrashock Master is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment when the treatment field includes:
-
Active infection
-
Open wounds
-
Malignant tumor
-
A fetus
-
Significant bleeding or coagulation disorder
-
Thrombosis
-
A pacemaker or implanted electronic device
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Major nerves or sensitive anatomical structures
-
Lung tissue or other air-containing organs
-
Brain or spinal structures
-
Active growth plates
-
Other contraindications listed in the user manual
High energy should not be applied directly over vulnerable organs, large blood vessels or other prohibited areas.
This is not an exhaustive list. Appropriate examination, diagnosis and clinical clearance are required before treatment.
Intended Professional Users
The Ultrashock Master is suitable for:
-
Physiotherapy practices
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine clinics
-
Orthopedic rehabilitation practices
-
Licensed multidisciplinary clinics
-
Qualified physical therapists
-
Other appropriately trained healthcare professionals
The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose Ultrashock Master?
Two Treatment Modalities
Combine radial pressure-wave treatment and 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound within one system.
Twelve Applicator Heads
Select from multiple applicator sizes and shapes for different professionally assessed areas.
Wide Parameter Range
Adjust radial pressure from 1–6 bar, frequency from 1–21 Hz and ultrasound intensity from 0.2–3.0 W/cm².
Twenty Body-Area Menus
Access ten menus for radial pressure-wave operation and ten for therapeutic ultrasound.
Protective Aluminium Case
Store and transport the machine, handpieces and accessories in an organized protective case.
Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is Ultrashock Master a focused shockwave system?
No. It uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. Radial and focused shockwaves have different physical characteristics.
What is the second treatment modality?
The system includes a 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece with continuous and pulsed operating modes.
Can the system be used for erectile dysfunction?
This pneumatic radial pressure-wave system should not be marketed as an ED-treatment device without a specific authorized indication and supporting clinical evidence for this exact technology.
Can it remove fat or cellulite?
The supplied operating parameters do not establish guaranteed fat reduction or cellulite removal. These claims should not be used without specific evidence and regulatory authorization.
Can both modalities be used during one appointment?
A qualified practitioner may incorporate both modalities into a treatment plan when clinically appropriate. They should not automatically be combined for every patient or condition.
Does every treatment use the pre-programmed settings?
No. The body-area menus provide starting configurations. The practitioner remains responsible for assessment and appropriate parameter selection.
Is treatment painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Pressure-wave therapy may produce discomfort, tenderness or temporary bruising. Settings should be adjusted according to clinical needs and patient tolerance.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Wear components, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Upgrade Your Professional Physiotherapy Platform
The Ultrashock Master combines:
-
Pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology
-
One-megahertz therapeutic ultrasound
-
Twelve interchangeable applicator heads
-
Twenty pre-programmed body-area menus
-
A protective aluminium transport case
Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$1,599.00
Professional Portable Electromagnetic Shockwave System
Wireless Technology for Qualified Medical and Men’s Health Practices
The ESWT PRO is a compact electromagnetic shockwave system developed for qualified healthcare professionals and specialized clinical environments.
A wireless treatment handpiece, 7-inch touchscreen, adjustable intensity and pre-programmed operating modes support flexible use in men’s health, rehabilitation and other applications permitted by the device’s certification and local regulations.
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is suitable for clinics requiring a compact platform that can be repositioned or transported between approved treatment locations.
Electromagnetic technology | Wireless handpiece | 4.5 kg system | Three-year warranty
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
ESWT PRO generates shockwave pulses using an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor.
Key operating features include:
-
Adjustable intensity from levels 1–10
-
Selectable pulse frequency from 10–20 Hz
-
Wireless treatment handpiece
-
Precision applicator
-
Pre-programmed operating modes
-
Color touchscreen control
-
Rechargeable portable operation
Electromagnetic and pneumatic systems use different energy-generation mechanisms. One technology should not be described as universally safer, more effective or more comfortable without direct comparative evidence for the specific devices.
Portable Wireless Design
The ESWT PRO platform is designed for professional mobility within appropriate clinical environments.
Lightweight System
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is easier to transport and reposition than many full-size shockwave platforms.
Wireless Handpiece
The rechargeable handpiece reduces cable restrictions during operation and can be returned to the supplied charging dock between treatments.
Extended Battery Operation
The supplied specification lists more than 10 hours of operation per full charge. Actual battery life may vary according to intensity, frequency, treatment duration and battery condition.
Compact Desktop Footprint
The system measures approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm with its dock, allowing installation in treatment rooms where space is limited.
Portable design does not automatically authorize house calls or mobile medical treatment. Operators remain responsible for maintaining privacy, hygiene, documentation, electrical safety and local healthcare compliance.
Potential Professional Applications
Depending on the device’s registered indications and applicable local regulations, shockwave technology may be evaluated for use within professional programs concerning:
-
Selected cases of vasculogenic erectile dysfunction
-
Men’s sexual-health assessment programs
-
Rehabilitation applications
-
Musculoskeletal treatment protocols
-
Other manufacturer-authorized professional uses
Low-intensity shockwave therapy should not be advertised as suitable for every cause or severity of erectile dysfunction.
ED may have vascular, neurological, hormonal, medication-related, psychological or mixed causes. Proper medical assessment is required before determining whether shockwave treatment is appropriate.
Evidence-Informed Positioning for Erectile Dysfunction
Published research suggests that low-intensity shockwave therapy may produce a modest improvement in erectile-function scores in some men with vasculogenic ED.
However:
-
Results are not consistent across all studies
-
Device technologies and energy outputs vary
-
Treatment protocols are not fully standardized
-
Not every ED cause is vascular
-
Benefits may diminish over time
-
No result can be guaranteed
-
Regulatory status differs between countries
Clinical Use Requires Proper Patient Selection
Appropriate patient assessment should include:
-
Complete medical history
-
Sexual history
-
Medication review
-
Cardiovascular-risk assessment
-
Identification of possible vascular, hormonal or neurological causes
-
Review of previous ED treatments
-
Physical examination where clinically indicated
-
Validated erectile-function questionnaire where appropriate
-
Discussion of available treatment alternatives
-
Informed consent
Only a qualified healthcare professional should diagnose erectile dysfunction or decide whether shockwave therapy is appropriate.
Important Limitations of Use
ESWT PRO should not be promoted for:
-
Guaranteed treatment of all ED severity levels
-
Permanent restoration of erectile function
-
Premature-ejaculation treatment without supporting indication
-
Dissolution of Peyronie’s plaque
-
Correction of penile curvature
-
Guaranteed recovery following prostate surgery
-
Replacement of prescribed medication
-
Unsupervised home use
-
Sexual-performance enhancement in clients without medical assessment
For Peyronie’s disease, shockwave therapy may be considered for pain in some circumstances, but it should not be marketed as reducing plaque size or correcting curvature.
Professional Treatment Workflow
1. Medical Assessment
A qualified professional reviews the patient’s medical and sexual history, cardiovascular status, medications, previous treatments and possible contraindications.
2. Treatment Planning
The clinician determines whether shockwave therapy is appropriate and selects a protocol consistent with the device instructions and applicable clinical guidance.
3. System Preparation
The wireless handpiece is checked, the applicator is prepared and the treatment area is positioned according to the approved protocol.
4. Parameter Selection
Intensity, frequency, pulse count and treatment locations are selected by the qualified operator.
5. Controlled Treatment
Shockwave pulses are delivered while the operator monitors patient comfort and tissue response.
6. Post-Treatment Review
The patient receives appropriate guidance, and the treatment parameters and any adverse responses are documented.
7. Follow-Up Assessment
Progress should be evaluated using an appropriate clinical method rather than relying only on subjective marketing claims.
Treatment Protocols
The appropriate protocol depends on:
-
Confirmed diagnosis
-
Device energy characteristics
-
Energy flux density
-
Pulse count
-
Pulse frequency
-
Treatment locations
-
Patient response
-
Clinical guidance
-
Local regulatory requirements
The supplied specifications mention pre-programmed ED modes and typical sessions of approximately 12–15 minutes. These settings should not be represented as universal clinical protocols.
A fixed course of 12–16 treatments, monthly maintenance or permanent maintenance benefits should not be promised without evidence for the specific device and patient.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product name | ESWT PRO |
| Product type | Portable professional shockwave system |
| Energy-generation method | Electromagnetic |
| Adjustable intensity | Levels 1–10 |
| Pulse frequency | 10–20 Hz |
| Treatment handpiece | Wireless rechargeable handpiece |
| User interface | 7-inch color touchscreen |
| Pre-programmed modes | Five ED-focused operating programs |
| Typical session duration | Approximately 12–15 minutes, protocol dependent |
| Listed battery operation | More than 10 hours per charge |
| Charging system | Desktop charging dock |
| System weight | Approximately 4.5 kg |
| Dimensions with dock | Approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm |
| Warranty | Three-year limited parts warranty |
| Technical support | Lifetime remote support |
| Certification | CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation |
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One ESWT PRO control system
-
One wireless treatment handpiece
-
One precision applicator
-
One desktop charging dock
-
Power supply suitable for the selected market
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
Applicable ISO documentation
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Operating instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Technical-support information
Professional Training
-
Equipment setup training
-
Touchscreen and handpiece operation
-
Intensity and frequency adjustment
-
Patient-screening guidance
-
Contraindication review
-
Treatment documentation
-
Cleaning and infection-control guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Training certificate after completion
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE-Certified Professional System
The ESWT PRO comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
Applicable ISO Documentation
The equipment must be used only for the indications and within the jurisdictions covered by its applicable certification and registration.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering:
-
System installation
-
Wireless handpiece charging
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Applicator preparation
-
Intensity and frequency controls
-
Pre-programmed modes
-
Patient-screening principles
-
Basic operating procedures
-
Cleaning and maintenance
-
Troubleshooting
A training certificate is provided after completion.
Equipment training does not qualify an unlicensed person to diagnose or treat erectile dysfunction. Medical training, professional licensing and local authorization remain the operator’s responsibility.
Three-Year Parts Warranty
The ESWT PRO is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main control system
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen
-
Original wireless handpiece
-
Charging dock
-
Power-supply components
-
Other eligible original parts
Battery cells, applicators and other consumable or limited-life components may have separate coverage conditions.
Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect charging or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping the handpiece
-
Normal battery degradation
-
Normal applicator wear
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Use outside the supplied instructions
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Contraindications and Clinical Precautions
This is professional equipment. Screening must be performed by a qualified healthcare professional.
Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment in patients with:
-
Active infection or inflammation in the treatment area
-
Open wounds or significant skin injury
-
Active malignancy in or near the treatment area
-
Significant bleeding disorders
-
Anticoagulant use
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Implanted devices affected by electromagnetic equipment
-
Severe uncontrolled cardiovascular disease
-
Untreated hypertension
-
Significant neurological impairment affecting sensation
-
Other contraindications identified in the user manual
Penile implants, recent pelvic procedures and complex urological conditions require specialist evaluation.
This is not an exhaustive list. The operator must follow the device manual, applicable medical guidance and local regulations.
Intended Professional Users
ESWT PRO is intended for appropriately qualified professionals working in settings such as:
-
Urology practices
-
Sexual-medicine clinics
-
Men’s health centers
-
Licensed medical clinics
-
Rehabilitation practices where the device is appropriately registered
-
Qualified multidisciplinary healthcare centers
The device is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose ESWT PRO?
Electromagnetic Energy Generation
The system uses an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor.
Wireless Handpiece
Rechargeable wireless operation supports flexible positioning during professional use.
Compact 4.5 kg Design
The lightweight system is easier to transport and install than many full-size shockwave platforms.
Adjustable Operation
Ten intensity levels and selectable 10–20 Hz frequency support protocol customization by qualified operators.
Touchscreen Interface
A 7-inch color display provides access to controls and pre-programmed modes.
Professional Training
Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included.
Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is electromagnetic shockwave therapy?
It is a method of generating shockwave pulses through an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Treatment characteristics depend on the device’s energy output, applicator and settings.
Is it appropriate for every type of ED?
No. ED has vascular, neurological, hormonal, psychological, medication-related and mixed causes. Medical assessment is necessary before treatment.
Is the treatment completely painless?
Patient experience varies. Adjustable intensity may help manage comfort, but pressure, vibration, sensitivity or discomfort may occur.
How many sessions are required?
There is no universal protocol suitable for every device or patient. Session number and frequency must be selected by a qualified clinician.
Can this machine be used for home visits?
Portable design may support professional mobility where legally permitted. The operator must maintain clinical privacy, sanitation, documentation and regulatory compliance.
Is the device approved for ED treatment in every country?
No. Regulatory status and permitted indications vary by jurisdiction. The device must only be marketed and used within the indications covered by its applicable registration.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This training does not replace professional medical qualifications.
What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved parts. Consumables, normal battery wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation.
Add Portable Shockwave Technology to Your Practice
ESWT PRO combines:
-
Electromagnetic shockwave generation
-
Wireless handpiece operation
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
A compact 4.5 kg design
-
A seven-inch touchscreen interface
Available exclusively for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations.
Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Receives in 8 days.
$1,699.00
Professional EMS and Radial Shockwave Therapy System
Dual-Technology Platform for Physiotherapy, Muscle Conditioning, and Rehabilitation
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 physiotherapy system that combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy on one compact platform.
Its reusable vacuum EMS cups provide hands-free muscle stimulation, while the dedicated shockwave handpiece delivers adjustable acoustic energy to targeted soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Both functions have independent control interfaces and can support combined treatment programs.
With nine EMS modes, dual-channel control, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, shockwave energy up to 200mJ, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and an 8kg portable design, EMSHOCK is suitable for physiotherapy, rehabilitation, sports recovery, and professional wellness applications.
EMS and radial shockwave | Hands-free vacuum cups | Nine EMS modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function delivers controlled electrical impulses through reusable vacuum treatment cups. These impulses produce repeated muscle contractions and relaxation cycles without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle-conditioning programs
-
Post-injury muscle rehabilitation
-
Muscle-weakness support
-
Atrophy-prevention programs
-
Sports-recovery treatments
-
General muscle stimulation
Radial Shockwave Therapy
The shockwave handpiece delivers controlled acoustic energy to selected soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Practitioners can adjust energy, frequency, preload, and total impact count according to the treatment protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
-
Sports-injury recovery
-
Chronic pain-management support
-
Professionally administered ED protocols
-
Selected body-contouring treatments
Simultaneous Dual-Technology Operation
The self-vacuum EMS cups operate hands-free while the practitioner controls the radial shockwave handpiece. This allows both technologies to be incorporated into the same treatment appointment.
This integrated configuration supports:
-
Muscle and connective-tissue treatments
-
Hands-free EMS stimulation
-
Practitioner-controlled shockwave delivery
-
Treatment of the same or different suitable areas
-
Customizable combined protocols
-
Efficient professional workflows
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Conditioning Program
Uses the EMS function to provide controlled muscle stimulation through one or two independently managed channels.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle strengthening support
-
Muscle endurance programs
-
Post-injury muscle conditioning
-
Reduced muscle-use concerns
-
General rehabilitation support
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Rehabilitation clients
-
Athletes and active adults
-
Clients with professionally assessed muscle weakness
Physiotherapy Shockwave Program
Uses adjustable radial shockwave parameters for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and connective-tissue treatments
-
Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs
-
Hip, knee, ankle, and foot treatments
-
Plantar-area treatments
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Clients with professionally assessed soft-tissue conditions
-
Rehabilitation and recovery clients
Combined EMS and Shockwave Program
Combines hands-free EMS treatment with practitioner-controlled radial shockwave therapy during the same appointment.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle and tendon rehabilitation
-
Post-injury recovery
-
Sports-rehabilitation programs
-
Combined muscle and soft-tissue treatment
-
Functional recovery support
Recommended for:
-
Clients requiring multi-layer treatment
-
Sports and rehabilitation clients
-
Clinics offering combined physiotherapy programs
Sports-Recovery Program
Uses EMS muscle stimulation, radial shockwave therapy, or both technologies according to the treatment objective.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle recovery
-
Tendon overuse conditions
-
Post-activity conditioning
-
Sports-injury rehabilitation
-
Return-to-activity support
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness clients
-
Sports-recovery facilities
Nine Adjustable EMS Treatment Modes
The EMS function provides nine treatment modes with adjustable frequency and energy. Mode selection should follow client assessment and the supplied professional protocols.
| EMS Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Treatment Modes | Nine | Different muscle-stimulation patterns |
| Maximum Frequency | 30Hz | Adjustable stimulation speed |
| Energy Levels | 1–10 | Progressive intensity control |
| Output Channels | Two independent channels | Treatment of two suitable muscle groups |
| Maximum Output | 100V | Professional EMS delivery |
| Applicators | Reusable vacuum cups | Hands-free muscle stimulation |
| Channel Control | Channel A and Channel B | Independent parameter management |
Dual-Channel Independent Control
Channel A and Channel B can be managed separately, allowing professionals to customize settings for different muscle groups or suitable treatment areas.
Common benefits include:
-
Independent intensity adjustment
-
Separate treatment settings
-
Two-area muscle stimulation
-
Personalized client programs
-
Flexible rehabilitation planning
Reusable Self-Vacuum Cups
The EMS cups use suction to maintain contact with suitable treatment areas.
Common benefits include:
-
Hands-free operation
-
Reusable applicators
-
No adhesive electrode pads
-
Reduced disposable-accessory requirements
-
Efficient applicator placement
Adjustable Shockwave Treatment Settings
The radial shockwave function allows practitioners to personalize the treatment according to the selected area and professional protocol.
| Shockwave Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Maximum Energy | 200mJ | Adjustable acoustic-wave output |
| Frequency | Adjustable | Personalized impact-delivery speed |
| Preload | Adjustable | Controlled handpiece response |
| Impact Counter | Real-time tracking | Accurate session documentation |
| Body-Part Menu | Integrated | Protocol and treatment-area selection |
| Control Interface | Independent touchscreen interface | Shockwave parameter management |
| Typical Area Time | Approximately 10 minutes | Efficient targeted treatments |
Shockwave settings must be selected according to client assessment, target tissue, treatment objective, and individual response.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
The EMS cups and shockwave handpiece support various upper-body muscle and soft-tissue programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Upper back
-
Elbow
-
Forearm
-
Hand and wrist
-
Suitable upper-arm muscle groups
Lower-Body Areas
The two technologies can be selected independently or incorporated into a combined treatment plan.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Thigh
-
Knee
-
Calf
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable professional protocols may also support selected body-contouring and intimate wellness services.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Thighs
-
Localized body areas
-
Professionally assessed ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Muscle Conditioning | Muscle activation, endurance, and strength support | EMS |
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs | Shockwave or combined |
| Sports Recovery | Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation | EMS and shockwave |
| Post-Injury Rehabilitation | Muscle conditioning and functional recovery | Combined program |
| Body Contouring | Muscle-toning and selected body programs | EMS or combined |
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols | Shockwave |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
EMSHOCK may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns
-
Muscle weakness
-
Post-injury muscle atrophy
-
Chronic musculoskeletal conditions
-
Suitable calcium-deposit concerns
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Sports-related overuse conditions
Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Technology and Area Selection
Choose EMS, radial shockwave, or a combined treatment. Identify the appropriate muscle groups and professionally assessed shockwave treatment areas.
Step 3: Applicator and Parameter Setup
Position the vacuum EMS cups over suitable muscle groups. Select Channel A or B settings, EMS mode, frequency, and energy. Configure shockwave energy, frequency, preload, and impact count.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Begin the selected EMS program. When appropriate, the practitioner can deliver radial shockwave therapy to the same or another suitable area while the EMS cups operate hands-free.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop both functions, remove the EMS cups, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSHOCK combines two professional treatment technologies within a lightweight and portable desktop system.
Key advantages include:
-
EMS and radial shockwave technologies
-
Hands-free reusable vacuum EMS cups
-
Nine EMS treatment modes
-
Adjustable EMS frequency up to 30Hz
-
Ten EMS energy levels
-
Dual-channel independent EMS control
-
Shockwave energy up to 200mJ
-
Adjustable shockwave frequency and preload
-
Integrated impact counter
-
Body-part selection menu
-
Independent treatment interfaces
-
10.4-inch color touchscreen
-
150W power consumption
-
Compact 46 × 53 × 38cm design
-
Lightweight 8kg construction
-
100–220V power compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMSHOCK |
| Model | ESWT-KA |
| Technology | Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave |
| Power Input | 100–220V, 60Hz |
| Power Consumption | 150W |
| Maximum Shockwave Energy | 200mJ |
| Shockwave Controls | Energy, frequency, preload, and impact count |
| EMS Maximum Output | 100V |
| EMS Frequency | Adjustable up to 30Hz |
| EMS Treatment Modes | Nine |
| EMS Energy Levels | Levels 1–10 |
| EMS Channels | Two independently controlled channels |
| EMS Applicators | Reusable self-vacuum cups |
| Display | 10.4-inch color touchscreen |
| Control System | Independent EMS and shockwave interfaces |
| Dimensions | 46 × 53 × 38cm |
| Net Weight | 8kg |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMSHOCK main unit
-
1 × Radial shockwave treatment handpiece
-
Reusable self-vacuum EMS treatment cups
-
Dual-channel EMS connection system
-
Integrated 10.4-inch color touchscreen
-
Nine EMS treatment modes
-
Independent Channel A and Channel B controls
-
Adjustable shockwave control system
-
Integrated body-part selection menu
-
Real-time impact counter
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The final number and configuration of EMS cups and shockwave heads should follow the selected package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
EMS operation training
-
Shockwave operation training
-
Vacuum-cup placement guidance
-
EMS mode and intensity guidance
-
Shockwave parameter guidance
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Sports-recovery protocol training
-
Combined-treatment guidance
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSHOCK system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Vacuum EMS cup placement
-
Channel A and Channel B controls
-
EMS mode selection
-
EMS frequency and energy adjustment
-
Shockwave handpiece operation
-
Shockwave energy and frequency adjustment
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
Combined EMS and shockwave treatments
-
Physiotherapy and sports-recovery protocols
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Shockwave heads, projectiles, seals, vacuum cups, tubing, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed health consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. EMSHOCK should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring professional clearance
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Neurological conditions affected by electrical stimulation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Do not place EMS applicators or deliver shockwave energy over prohibited anatomical regions, including areas identified as unsuitable in the operating manual.
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cups, tubing, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Select the correct technology and treatment protocol.
-
Position vacuum cups only on suitable muscle areas.
-
Begin with conservative energy and frequency settings.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client response.
-
Use suitable coupling medium for shockwave treatment.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record EMS and shockwave settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Fitness and recovery centers
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness facilities
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMS or shockwave treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSHOCK?
Two Technologies on One Platform
The system combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy for muscle, tendon, soft-tissue, and recovery programs.
Hands-Free Vacuum EMS Cups
Reusable self-vacuum cups maintain contact without adhesive pads, allowing the EMS function to operate while the practitioner performs suitable shockwave treatments.
Independent Dual-Channel Control
Channel A and Channel B can be configured separately for personalized muscle-stimulation programs.
Portable Professional Design
At 8kg with a compact desktop footprint, EMSHOCK is suitable for treatment rooms, multi-room facilities, and professional transport.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is EMSHOCK?
EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 system combining Electrical Muscle Stimulation with radial shockwave therapy.
What is the difference between the two technologies?
EMS delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles. Radial shockwave delivers acoustic pressure waves to professionally identified soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas.
Can both functions be used during the same appointment?
Yes. The vacuum EMS cups can operate hands-free while a practitioner delivers shockwave treatment to the same or another suitable area, when supported by the selected protocol.
How are the vacuum cups different from adhesive electrodes?
The reusable cups use suction to maintain contact and do not require disposable adhesive pads. Correct placement, suction level, cleaning, and client screening remain essential.
How many EMS modes are available?
The system includes nine EMS treatment modes, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, and ten energy levels.
Can two muscle groups be treated?
The machine includes two independently controlled EMS channels. Suitable treatment configurations depend on the number of cups supplied and the selected protocol.
What is the maximum shockwave energy?
The radial shockwave function provides maximum energy up to 200mJ.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, back, hip, thigh, knee, calf, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, buttocks, and other professionally assessed areas.
How long does a treatment take?
Shockwave treatment may take approximately 10 minutes per area. EMS sessions commonly take 20–30 minutes. Combined appointment time depends on the selected protocol and number of areas.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocols indicate three to four shockwave sessions for some conditions and six to twelve EMS sessions for muscle-conditioning programs. The final plan should be individualized following professional assessment.
Can EMSHOCK support ED treatment protocols?
The shockwave function may support professionally administered ED protocols. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
EMS commonly produces pulsing and muscle-contraction sensations. Shockwave may cause temporary discomfort over sensitive areas. Both technologies have adjustable settings to support appropriate client tolerance.
Are treatment results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to the condition, treatment area, selected settings, number of sessions, client health, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers EMS, shockwave therapy, vacuum-cup placement, parameter selection, combined protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Dual-Technology Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK enables qualified professionals to combine hands-free muscle stimulation and radial shockwave therapy using one lightweight platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave technology
-
Nine EMS modes with independent dual-channel control
-
Reusable hands-free vacuum EMS cups
-
Adjustable shockwave energy up to 200mJ
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,900.00
Professional Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy in a Portable Flight-Case Design
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one compact platform.
The electromagnetic handpiece delivers focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece produces radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate modality according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
With two treatment handpieces, 18 interchangeable treatment tips, three dedicated interfaces, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and a compact flight-case design, the Dual Wave Mini is suitable for clinics that require multi-application performance without a large equipment footprint.
Two shockwave technologies | 18 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | Compact flight case | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery supports treatments requiring accurate energy placement within a selected area.
Common applications include:
-
Focused musculoskeletal treatments
-
Tendon and soft-tissue programs
-
Sports-injury rehabilitation
-
Localized physiotherapy applications
-
Erectile-function treatment protocols
-
Targeted recovery programs
Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The projectile strikes the selected treatment tip, creating radial pressure waves that disperse across a broader tissue area.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite treatments
-
Body-contouring programs
-
Broad soft-tissue areas
-
Physiotherapy treatments
-
Sports-recovery programs
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces can be selected directly from the system, allowing practitioners to switch between electromagnetic and pneumatic treatments according to the application.
This integrated configuration supports:
-
Focused and radial treatment options
-
Multiple professional applications
-
Customizable treatment protocols
-
Efficient service transitions
-
Reduced equipment requirements
-
Flexible clinical workflows
Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client
Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, preload selection, and switching between electromagnetic and pneumatic delivery.
Recommended applications:
-
Professional erectile-function protocols
-
Vascular-support treatment programs
-
Targeted acoustic-wave applications
-
Structured multi-session treatments
Recommended for:
-
Appropriately screened adult male clients
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Qualified professionals offering ED protocols
This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements.
Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and customizable parameters for different treatment zones.
Recommended applications:
-
Cellulite appearance treatments
-
Body-texture improvement
-
Localized body-contouring programs
-
Soft-tissue stimulation
-
Skin-firming support
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about visible cellulite
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clinics offering structured body-care programs
Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface supports treatment planning for key musculoskeletal regions and provides adjustable shockwave parameters.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs
-
Hip, knee, foot, and ankle treatments
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
-
Localized pain-management support
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Rehabilitation clients
-
Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns
Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select focused electromagnetic energy or radial pneumatic pressure waves according to the location, depth, and size of the treatment area.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon overuse conditions
-
Muscle and soft-tissue recovery
-
Post-injury rehabilitation
-
Shoulder, knee, and ankle programs
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness and rehabilitation clients
-
Sports-recovery facilities
Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control
The electromagnetic handpiece provides adjustable focused-shockwave settings for precise professional applications.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Energy | 5–200mJ | Adjustable focused acoustic output |
| Frequency | 1–16Hz | Customizable pulse-delivery speed |
| Treatment Heads | Seven | Different focused applications |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two | Dedicated professional protocols |
| Preload Settings | Six | Customizable treatment response |
| Control Interface | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Parameter and protocol management |
Settings should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied protocols.
Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial shockwave settings for broad and targeted treatment areas.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Pressure | 1–6 Bar | Adjustable radial-wave intensity |
| Frequency | 1–21Hz | Customizable impact-delivery speed |
| Treatment Heads | Eleven | Broad treatment versatility |
| Head Diameters | 6–25mm | Small and large treatment areas |
| Tip Replacement | Easy-change mechanism | Efficient treatment preparation |
| Mechanism | Compressed-air ballistic | Radial pressure-wave generation |
Eighteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave Mini includes seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads to support different treatment areas and protocols.
| Tip Group | Quantity | Primary Applications |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven | Precise and focused treatment areas |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two of the seven electromagnetic heads | Professional erectile-function protocols |
| Pneumatic Heads | Eleven | Radial and broad soft-tissue treatments |
| Pneumatic Tip Diameters | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm | Different anatomical areas |
| Total Treatment Tips | Eighteen | Multi-application treatment coverage |
The correct treatment tip should be selected according to its intended function, treatment location, client condition, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
The available electromagnetic and pneumatic heads support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Elbow
-
Hand and wrist
-
Upper back
-
Suitable arm muscles and tendons
Lower-Body Areas
The handpiece, treatment tip, and parameters can be selected according to the size and location of the target area.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Knee
-
Thigh
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally administered body and intimate wellness programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Inner and outer thighs
-
Legs
-
Suitable ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally assessed acoustic-wave protocols | Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode |
| Cellulite Treatments | Cellulite appearance and body texture | Pneumatic radial |
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue treatments | Electromagnetic or pneumatic |
| Sports Recovery | Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation | Protocol-dependent |
| Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation | Functional recovery and localized discomfort | Focused or radial shockwave |
| Body Contouring | Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs | Pneumatic radial |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The Dual Wave Mini may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns
-
Chronic musculoskeletal conditions
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Professionally assessed tendon and ligament concerns
Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application.
Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment tip and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, delivery mode, and number of impacts.
Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the selected settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave Mini combines dual-technology performance with a portable, space-efficient flight-case design.
Key advantages include:
-
Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies
-
Two selectable professional handpieces
-
Seven electromagnetic treatment heads
-
Eleven pneumatic treatment heads
-
Eighteen treatment tips in total
-
Three dedicated treatment interfaces
-
Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency
-
Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency
-
Two delivery modes
-
Six customizable preload settings
-
10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Impact-counting function
-
Reinforced treatment-tip construction
-
Easy pneumatic projectile replacement
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
Compact flight-case design
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini |
| Model | Dual Wave Mini |
| Technology | Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave |
| Input Voltage | AC 110V or 220V |
| Power Consumption | 300W |
| Display | 10.4-inch touchscreen |
| Treatment Handpieces | Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic |
| Treatment Modes | ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy |
| Electromagnetic Frequency | 1–16Hz |
| Electromagnetic Energy | 5–200mJ |
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven, including two ED-specific heads |
| Pneumatic Frequency | 1–21Hz |
| Pneumatic Pressure | 1–6 Bar |
| Pneumatic Heads | Eleven |
| Pneumatic Tip Diameters | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm |
| Total Treatment Tips | Eighteen |
| Delivery Modes | Two |
| Preload Settings | Six |
| Special Features | Treatment mapping, impact tracking, storage tank, and easy projectile replacement |
| Packing Size | 48 × 58 × 50cm |
| Weight | 35kg |
| Design | Compact portable flight case |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini main unit
-
1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece
-
1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece
-
7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads
-
11 × Pneumatic treatment heads
-
18 × Total treatment tips
-
1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Three dedicated treatment interfaces
-
Two treatment-delivery modes
-
Six preload settings
-
Real-time impact counter
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
Compact flight case
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Dual-technology operation training
-
Electromagnetic parameter guidance
-
Pneumatic parameter guidance
-
Treatment-tip selection guidance
-
ED protocol training
-
Anti-cellulite protocol training
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave Mini includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both shockwave technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Electromagnetic handpiece operation
-
Pneumatic handpiece operation
-
Treatment-tip selection
-
Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
ED treatment interface
-
Anti-cellulite treatment interface
-
Physiotherapy treatment interface
-
Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Pneumatic projectile replacement
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Treatment heads, projectiles, seals, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave Mini should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring medical clearance
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and treatment tips before use.
-
Select the correct modality and treatment tip.
-
Begin with conservative treatment settings.
-
Increase energy or pressure progressively according to client response.
-
Use suitable coupling medium where required.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the treatment.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment settings and impact counts.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Replace worn projectiles and components as directed.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness centers
-
Mobile or multi-location professional practices
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing shockwave treatments.
OEM and ODM Customization
Wikbeauty provides OEM and ODM services for professional distributors, clinics, and equipment brands.
Available customization may include:
-
Technology configuration
-
External case design
-
Machine color customization
-
Logo placement
-
Interface customization
-
Packaging design
-
Product documentation
-
Distributor branding
Final customization options, minimum quantities, production time, and pricing should be confirmed with the Wikbeauty sales team.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves for precise and broad-area applications.
Eighteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility across different anatomical regions.
Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes simplify parameter selection, body mapping, and treatment tracking.
Compact Flight-Case Design
The 48 × 58 × 50cm flight-case configuration is suitable for smaller treatment rooms, second treatment rooms, storage, transport, and multi-location practices.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, OEM and ODM options, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave Mini?
The Dual Wave Mini is a compact professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform.
How does it differ from the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave Mini provides the same two shockwave modalities in a smaller flight-case design. It includes 18 treatment tips, operates at 300W, weighs 35kg, and has a packing size of 48 × 58 × 50cm.
What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications.
How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 18 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads.
What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides energy from 5 to 200mJ and frequency from 1 to 16Hz.
What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides pressure from 1 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz.
Which treatment modes are available?
The system includes dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications.
Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. Treatment should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, selected settings, and individual sensitivity. Parameters can be adjusted during treatment to maintain suitable tolerance.
How many sessions are recommended?
Session number and frequency depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment outcomes and course length should not be guaranteed.
Is the system suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its compact flight-case design makes it more portable than a full-size floor-standing system. Safe transport, equipment protection, and suitable treatment-room conditions remain essential.
Does Wikbeauty provide OEM and ODM services?
Yes. Available services include equipment configuration, case design, logo customization, interface options, and packaging customization.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both technologies, treatment-tip selection, parameter adjustment, the three treatment interfaces, client screening, safety, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini enables qualified clinics and mobile practitioners to offer electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Focused electromagnetic and radial pneumatic technologies
-
Eighteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications
-
Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces
-
Portable flight-case design with a design with a 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Professional training, OEM and ODM services, and a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, customization options, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,153.00
Professional Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Therapy System
Adjustable Air-Pressure Technology for Physiotherapy, Recovery, Body, and ED Applications
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system developed for physiotherapy, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, sports recovery, cellulite treatments, body-contouring programs, and professionally administered erectile-function protocols.
Its high-performance compressor accelerates an internal projectile inside the treatment handpiece, creating controlled pressure waves that are transferred into the selected treatment area through interchangeable heads.
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar, frequency from 1 to 21Hz, eleven treatment heads, continuous and pulse modes, six preload settings, an impact counter, and an upgraded ED treatment interface.
0.5–6 Bar pressure | Eleven treatment heads | 1–21Hz frequency | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The ESWT-KP-B uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the treatment handpiece. When the projectile reaches the selected treatment head, it generates mechanical pressure waves that travel into the targeted tissue.
Common applications include:
-
Physiotherapy treatments
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
-
Sports-injury recovery
-
Tendon and soft-tissue programs
-
Cellulite treatments
-
Body-contouring programs
-
Professional erectile-function protocols
Adjustable Continuous and Pulse Modes
The system includes two delivery options for different professional treatment strategies.
C Mode delivers continuous impacts according to the selected frequency. P Mode provides pulsed delivery for protocols requiring a different impact pattern.
Common benefits include:
-
Customizable treatment delivery
-
Different programs for different conditions
-
Adjustable client-comfort levels
-
Precise impact management
-
Flexible professional protocols
Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded software includes a dedicated interface for professionally administered erectile-function protocols. It supports treatment-zone management, parameter adjustment, and accurate impact counting.
Common features include:
-
Dedicated ED treatment mode
-
Five-zone treatment planning
-
Adjustable pressure and frequency
-
Real-time impact counting
-
Structured multi-session protocols
-
Professional treatment documentation
ED applications should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Physiotherapy Program
Designed for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Shoulder, elbow, and wrist programs
-
Hip, knee, and ankle treatments
-
Plantar-area treatments
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Rehabilitation clients
-
Adults with professionally assessed musculoskeletal conditions
Sports-Recovery Program
Uses customizable pressure, frequency, and treatment heads to support targeted recovery programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Overuse-related conditions
-
Tendon recovery
-
Muscle and soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Post-activity recovery support
-
Suitable sports injuries
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness and recovery clients
-
Sports-rehabilitation facilities
Anti-Cellulite and Body Program
Uses radial or flat treatment heads for broader body areas and professional aesthetic protocols.
Recommended applications:
-
Cellulite appearance treatments
-
Body-texture improvement
-
Localized body-contouring programs
-
Skin-firming support
-
Soft-tissue stimulation
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about visible cellulite
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clinics offering structured body-care programs
Erectile-Function Treatment Program
Uses the upgraded ED treatment software and suitable heads for professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols.
Recommended applications:
-
Professionally assessed erectile-function concerns
-
Vascular-support treatment programs
-
Structured acoustic-wave treatment courses
-
Men’s intimate wellness services
Recommended for:
-
Appropriately screened adult male clients
-
Specialist men’s wellness clinics
-
Qualified healthcare or wellness professionals
Adjustable Pressure, Frequency, and Treatment Settings
The ESWT-KP-B allows practitioners to customize shockwave treatments according to the selected application, treatment area, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Pressure | 0.5–6 Bar | Adjustable treatment intensity |
| Frequency | 1–21Hz | Customizable impact-delivery speed |
| Delivery Modes | Continuous and pulse | Different treatment patterns |
| Preload Settings | Six | Customizable projectile response |
| Treatment Heads | Eleven | Small, medium, and broad treatment areas |
| Impact Counter | Real-time tracking | Accurate session documentation |
| Display | 8-inch touchscreen | Parameter and protocol management |
All parameters should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied operating protocols.
Eleven Interchangeable Treatment Heads
The ESWT-KP-B includes radial, focus, and flat treatment heads in sizes ranging from 6mm to 25mm.
| Head Type | Available Sizes | General Application |
|---|---|---|
| Radial Heads | 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm | Broad soft-tissue and body-area treatments |
| Focus Heads | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm | Concentrated and targeted applications |
| Flat Heads | 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm | Controlled surface and body treatments |
| Total Heads | Eleven | Complete professional treatment selection |
Radial Treatment Heads
Radial heads disperse pressure waves across a wider tissue area.
Common applications include:
-
Larger muscle groups
-
Broad soft-tissue regions
-
Cellulite treatments
-
General physiotherapy programs
-
Body-contouring applications
Focus Treatment Heads
Focus heads concentrate the mechanical energy within a smaller treatment area.
Common applications include:
-
Localized treatment points
-
Tendon attachments
-
Small musculoskeletal areas
-
Focused rehabilitation programs
-
Selected ED treatment zones
Flat Treatment Heads
Flat heads provide controlled contact across suitable surface areas.
Common applications include:
-
Body-texture treatments
-
Surface-level soft-tissue applications
-
Cellulite programs
-
Medium-sized treatment regions
-
General wellness treatments
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
Different head sizes and pressure settings can be selected for upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Elbow
-
Hand and wrist
-
Upper back
-
Suitable arm muscles and tendons
Lower-Body Areas
The treatment head and parameters can be customized according to the location and size of the lower-body treatment area.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Knee
-
Thigh
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable heads and dedicated software support professionally administered body and intimate wellness protocols.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Inner and outer thighs
-
Legs
-
Professionally assessed ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Suggested Head Type |
|---|---|---|
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs | Focus or radial |
| Sports Recovery | Tendon, muscle, and overuse-related conditions | Protocol-dependent |
| Rehabilitation | Functional recovery and localized discomfort | Focus or radial |
| Cellulite Treatments | Cellulite appearance and body texture | Radial or flat |
| Body Contouring | Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs | Radial |
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols | Suitable focus head |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The ESWT-KP-B may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Ankle, knee, and wrist concerns
-
Shoulder impingement
-
Rotator-cuff concerns
-
Lumbar and hip discomfort
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Professionally assessed calcification concerns
Diagnosis, suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Program and Head Selection
Select the appropriate physiotherapy, aesthetic, sports-recovery, rehabilitation, or ED program. Install the treatment head suited to the area and protocol.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select continuous or pulse mode, pressure, frequency, preload, and total impact count. Begin with conservative settings and adjust progressively according to client response.
Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client comfort.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the coupling medium, inspect the area, document the treatment settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The ESWT-KP-B combines adjustable pneumatic shockwave technology with a compact footprint and extensive treatment-head selection.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave technology
-
Adjustable 0.5–6 Bar pressure
-
Adjustable 1–21Hz frequency
-
Continuous and pulse delivery modes
-
Six customizable preload settings
-
Eleven interchangeable treatment heads
-
Radial, focus, and flat head designs
-
Head sizes from 6mm to 25mm
-
Upgraded ED treatment software
-
Real-time impact counter
-
8-inch color touchscreen
-
Easy projectile-replacement mechanism
-
200W power output
-
Compact 58 × 46 × 38cm package
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B |
| Model | ESWT-KP-B |
| Technology | Pneumatic ballistic shockwave |
| Energy Range | 0.5–6 Bar |
| Frequency Range | 1–21Hz |
| Power Output | 200W |
| Treatment Handpieces | One pneumatic ballistic handpiece |
| Treatment Heads | Eleven |
| Head Types | Radial, focus, and flat |
| Head Sizes | 6–25mm |
| Radial Heads | 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm |
| Focus Heads | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm |
| Flat Heads | 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm |
| Display | 8-inch color touchscreen |
| Delivery Modes | Continuous and pulse |
| Preload Settings | Six |
| ED Treatment Software | Upgraded dedicated protocol |
| Impact Counter | Real-time session tracking |
| Package Dimensions | 58 × 46 × 38cm |
| Volume Weight | 28kg |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B main unit
-
1 × Pneumatic ballistic treatment handpiece
-
4 × Radial treatment heads
-
4 × Focus treatment heads
-
3 × Flat treatment heads
-
11 × Total treatment heads
-
1 × Integrated 8-inch touchscreen
-
Continuous and pulse treatment modes
-
Six preload settings
-
Real-time impact counter
-
Upgraded ED treatment software
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Pneumatic shockwave operation training
-
Treatment-head selection guidance
-
Pressure and frequency adjustment guidance
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Sports-recovery protocol training
-
Anti-cellulite protocol training
-
ED treatment protocol training
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every ESWT-KP-B includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Pneumatic handpiece operation
-
Treatment-head selection
-
Pressure and frequency adjustment
-
Continuous and pulse modes
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
Physiotherapy applications
-
Sports-recovery applications
-
Anti-cellulite applications
-
ED treatment software
-
Projectile replacement
-
Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The ESWT-KP-B should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring medical clearance
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active penile or genital infection
-
Active inflammation in the treatment area
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cables, and treatment heads before use.
-
Select the correct treatment head for the application.
-
Begin with conservative pressure and frequency settings.
-
Increase parameters progressively according to client response.
-
Use suitable coupling medium where required.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record pressure, frequency, mode, and impact count.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment.
-
Replace worn projectiles and components as directed.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness centers
-
Qualified medical and allied-health practices
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B?
Adjustable Pneumatic Shockwave Technology
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz for personalized professional protocols.
Eleven Treatment Heads
Radial, focus, and flat heads in sizes from 6mm to 25mm support precise and broad treatment areas.
Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded interface provides structured treatment-zone management, adjustable parameters, and impact tracking for professionally administered protocols.
Multiple Professional Applications
One platform supports physiotherapy, sports recovery, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, cellulite treatments, body contouring, and ED programs.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes clinical operation training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the ESWT-KP-B?
The ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system that generates mechanical pressure waves through a compressor-powered treatment handpiece.
How does pneumatic ballistic shockwave work?
Compressed air accelerates a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected treatment head, creating pressure waves that transfer into the targeted tissue.
What pressure and frequency ranges are available?
The machine provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz.
How many treatment heads are included?
The system includes eleven heads: four radial, four focus, and three flat treatment heads.
What is the difference between the treatment heads?
Radial heads provide broader pressure-wave distribution, focus heads concentrate treatment on smaller areas, and flat heads provide controlled contact for suitable surface and body applications.
Which treatment modes are available?
The machine includes continuous and pulse delivery modes, six preload settings, and an upgraded ED treatment interface.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar region, hip, knee, thigh, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, legs, and suitable ED treatment zones.
Can the machine be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. Radial and flat treatment heads can be incorporated into professional cellulite and body-texture programs.
Can it support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. The machine includes upgraded ED software and suitable treatment heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, pressure, frequency, and individual sensitivity. Settings can be adjusted during the session to maintain appropriate tolerance.
How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and treatment protocol. Results and required course length should not be guaranteed.
Can it be combined with other treatments?
It may be incorporated into a broader professional treatment plan when the combination is appropriate, compatible, and permitted within the practitioner’s scope.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, treatment-head selection, pressure and frequency settings, treatment protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide customizable pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Adjustable pneumatic pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar
-
Frequency control from 1 to 21Hz
-
Eleven radial, focus, and flat treatment heads
-
Dedicated ED software with continuous and pulse modes
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,599.00
Professional Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Technology for Multi-Application Treatments
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic technologies on one integrated platform.
Its electromagnetic handpiece provides focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece generates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate technology according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
The system includes 19 treatment tips, three dedicated treatment interfaces, a 10.4-inch color touchscreen, adjustable energy and frequency settings, a built-in cooling system, and an impact counter.
Two shockwave technologies | 19 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery is designed for smaller treatment zones and applications that require precise energy placement.
Common applications include:
-
Focused musculoskeletal treatments
-
Tendon and soft-tissue programs
-
Localized pain-management support
-
Sports-injury rehabilitation
-
Erectile-function treatment protocols
-
Targeted physiotherapy applications
Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The resulting impact creates radial pressure waves that disperse through a broader tissue area.
Common applications include:
-
Large soft-tissue areas
-
Cellulite treatments
-
Body-contouring programs
-
Broad physiotherapy applications
-
Muscle and connective-tissue treatments
-
Sports-recovery programs
Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces allow practitioners to select focused electromagnetic energy or broader pneumatic pressure waves without purchasing separate systems.
This integrated configuration supports:
-
Precise and broad treatment options
-
Multiple professional applications
-
Customizable treatment protocols
-
Efficient switching between services
-
Reduced equipment requirements
-
Flexible clinical workflows
Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client
Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, round tracking, preload selection, and electromagnetic or pneumatic mode options.
Recommended applications:
-
Professional erectile-function protocols
-
Vascular-support treatment programs
-
Targeted acoustic-wave applications
-
Structured multi-session treatments
Recommended for:
-
Appropriately screened adult male clients
-
Specialist men’s wellness clinics
-
Qualified practitioners offering ED protocols
This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements.
Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and adjustable settings for different treatment zones.
Recommended applications:
-
Cellulite appearance treatments
-
Localized body-contouring programs
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Soft-tissue stimulation
-
Body wellness treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about visible cellulite
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clinics offering structured body-care programs
Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface covers nine musculoskeletal regions and supports customizable frequency, energy, and impact settings.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Sports-injury recovery programs
-
Chronic musculoskeletal conditions
-
Rehabilitation support
-
Localized pain-management programs
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Sports and recovery clients
-
Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns
Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select the appropriate electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the size, depth, and location of the target area.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon overuse conditions
-
Muscle and soft-tissue recovery
-
Shoulder, elbow, knee, and ankle programs
-
Post-activity recovery support
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness and rehabilitation clients
Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control
The electromagnetic handpiece offers adjustable focused-shockwave parameters for precise treatments.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Energy | 5–200mJ | Adjustable focused acoustic output |
| Frequency | 1–16Hz | Customizable pulse-delivery speed |
| Treatment Heads | Seven | Different focused applications |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two | Dedicated professional protocols |
| Preload Settings | Six | Customizable treatment response |
| Monitoring | Handpiece-mounted display | Real-time setting observation |
| Cooling | Built-in cooling fan | Supports continued operation |
Settings should be selected according to the treatment area, professional protocol, and client response.
Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial pressure-wave settings for broader treatment areas.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Pressure | 1–6 Bar | Adjustable radial-wave intensity |
| Frequency | 1–21Hz | Customizable impact speed |
| Treatment Heads | Twelve | Broad treatment versatility |
| Head Types | Focus, radial, and flat | Different pressure-wave distributions |
| Head Diameters | 6–25mm | Small and large treatment zones |
| Tip Changing | Easy-change mechanism | Efficient treatment preparation |
| Mechanism | Compressed-air ballistic | Radial pressure-wave generation |
Nineteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave C includes seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads to support different treatment depths, areas, and professional applications.
| Tip Group | Quantity | Primary Applications |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven | Precise and focused treatment zones |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two of the seven electromagnetic heads | Professional erectile-function protocols |
| Pneumatic Focus Heads | Included within the twelve pneumatic heads | Concentrated radial treatment |
| Pneumatic Radial Heads | Included within the twelve pneumatic heads | General soft-tissue treatment |
| Pneumatic Flat Heads | Included within the twelve pneumatic heads | Broader surface coverage |
| Total Treatment Tips | Nineteen | Multi-application clinical coverage |
The exact tip should be selected according to its intended function, the treatment area, and the supplied professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
The available heads and treatment settings support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery applications.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Elbow
-
Hand and wrist
-
Upper back
-
Selected arm muscles and tendons
Lower-Body Areas
Focused or radial shockwave delivery can be selected according to the size and location of the lower-body treatment area.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Knee
-
Thigh
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally assessed body and intimate wellness applications.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Inner and outer thighs
-
Legs
-
Suitable ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally assessed vascular-support protocols | Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode |
| Cellulite Treatments | Body texture and cellulite appearance | Pneumatic radial |
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions | Electromagnetic or pneumatic |
| Sports Recovery | Muscle, tendon, and activity-related recovery | Protocol-dependent |
| Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation | Functional recovery and localized pain support | Focused or radial shockwave |
| Body Contouring | Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs | Pneumatic radial |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The Dual Wave C may be incorporated into professional protocols for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Shoulder impingement
-
Rotator-cuff concerns
-
Suitable wrist and hand conditions
-
Knee and ankle concerns
-
Lumbar and hip discomfort
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
Treatment suitability, diagnosis, parameters, and expected outcomes must be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, current symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the appropriate ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application.
Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment head and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, and number of impacts.
Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave C combines two shockwave technologies, specialized interfaces, and extensive treatment-head options in one clinical platform.
Key advantages include:
-
Electromagnetic and pneumatic technologies
-
Two independent professional handpieces
-
Seven electromagnetic treatment heads
-
Twelve pneumatic treatment heads
-
Nineteen treatment tips in total
-
Three dedicated treatment interfaces
-
Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency
-
Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency
-
Six preload settings
-
10.4-inch color touchscreen
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Integrated impact counter
-
Built-in handpiece cooling
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
500W power consumption
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Dual Wave C |
| Model | ESWT-DOUBLE-C |
| Technology | Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave |
| Input Voltage | AC 110V or 220V |
| Power Consumption | 500W |
| Display | 10.4-inch color touchscreen |
| Treatment Handpieces | Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic |
| Treatment Modes | ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy |
| Electromagnetic Frequency | 1–16Hz |
| Electromagnetic Energy | 5–200mJ |
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven, including two ED-specific heads |
| Pneumatic Frequency | 1–21Hz |
| Pneumatic Pressure | 1–6 Bar |
| Pneumatic Heads | Twelve |
| Pneumatic Head Types | Focus, radial, and flat |
| Pneumatic Head Diameters | 6–25mm |
| Total Treatment Tips | Nineteen |
| Preload Settings | Six |
| Special Features | Cooling system, storage tank, and impact counter |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave C main unit
-
1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece
-
1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece
-
7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads
-
12 × Pneumatic treatment heads
-
19 × Total treatment tips
-
1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Built-in handpiece cooling system
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
Impact-counting system
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Dual-technology operation training
-
Electromagnetic parameter guidance
-
Pneumatic parameter guidance
-
Treatment-head selection guidance
-
ED protocol training
-
Anti-cellulite protocol training
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave C system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Electromagnetic handpiece operation
-
Pneumatic handpiece operation
-
Treatment-head selection
-
Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
ED treatment interface
-
Anti-cellulite treatment interface
-
Physiotherapy treatment interface
-
Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave C should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring medical clearance
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and heads before treatment.
-
Select the correct handpiece and treatment head.
-
Begin with conservative settings.
-
Increase energy or pressure progressively according to response.
-
Use appropriate coupling medium where required.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment settings and impact counts.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness centers
-
Qualified medical and allied-health practices
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave C?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves, supporting precise and broad-area applications on one platform.
Nineteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility for different anatomical areas and professional protocols.
Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes streamline parameter selection, body-area mapping, impact counting, and treatment documentation.
Customizable Professional Settings
Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, preload, and impact settings allow professionals to personalize each session.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave C is a professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform.
What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue areas.
How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 19 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads.
Which treatment modes are available?
The touchscreen provides three dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications.
What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides an energy range of 5–200mJ and a frequency range of 1–16Hz.
What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides a pressure range of 1–6 Bar and a frequency range of 1–21Hz.
Which areas can be treated?
Supported areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar area, hip, knee, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, legs, and suitable intimate wellness treatment zones.
Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and dedicated anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies by treatment area, condition, energy level, and individual sensitivity. Intensity can be adjusted during treatment to maintain appropriate tolerance.
How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment plans should be personalized rather than guaranteed.
Can both handpieces operate simultaneously?
The supplied configuration includes two independent handpieces and supports dual-handpiece operation. Actual use should follow the operating manual and selected professional protocol.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both shockwave technologies, the three treatment interfaces, treatment-head selection, parameter adjustment, client screening, safety, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies
-
Nineteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications
-
Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces
-
Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, and impact settings
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
De la $2,699.00
Professional EMS Muscle-Toning and Body-Contouring System
Non-Invasive Electrical Muscle Stimulation for Targeted Body Sculpting
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support muscle conditioning, body toning, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions. These contractions help activate muscle fibers and support structured muscle-toning programs without conventional weight training during treatment.
With multiple treatment applicators, adjustable intensity levels, a clear LCD interface, and portable construction, the system can be used for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
EMS muscle stimulation | Multiple applicators | Adjustable intensity | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology sends controlled electrical impulses through the treatment applicators and into targeted muscles. These impulses generate repeated involuntary contractions throughout the selected program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Thigh muscle stimulation
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
General body-toning programs
Targeted Body Contouring
Applicators can be positioned over specific muscle groups, enabling practitioners to create personalized treatments according to the client’s body-contouring objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Waistline definition
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Inner- and outer-thigh toning
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Lower-leg definition
Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to the selected area and client comfort. This enables practitioners to begin at a lower setting and increase the stimulation progressively.
Common benefits include:
-
Personalized treatment intensity
-
Progressive muscle activation
-
Different settings for different body areas
-
Improved client comfort
-
Structured multi-session programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus on repeated muscle activation and improved muscle tone in a selected area.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Arm muscle stimulation
-
Thigh and calf conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved muscle definition
-
Clients supplementing regular fitness activities
-
Clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation
Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on improving the appearance and definition of selected body areas through targeted EMS treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Waistline contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Inner-thigh toning
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Upper-arm definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about reduced muscle tone
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette
-
Clients following an active and balanced lifestyle
Multi-Area Sculpting Program
Allows practitioners to create a structured plan covering several body areas over a series of sessions.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and buttocks
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Arms and abdomen
-
Thighs and calves
-
Complete body-toning packages
Recommended for:
-
Clients with several treatment objectives
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Professional clinics offering treatment packages
Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients continue their muscle-conditioning routine after completing an initial treatment course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Seasonal body-shaping programs
-
Continued fitness and wellness support
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMS clients
-
Clients who have completed six to eight sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Intensity and Treatment Settings
The EMS Sculpting Machine allows treatment intensity to be customized according to the body area, selected protocol, and client comfort.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Intensity Levels | 1–10 | Progressive, comfort-based muscle stimulation |
| Stimulation Frequency | Adjustable | Customizable treatment protocols |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple | Treatments for different muscle groups |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes | Efficient professional or personal use |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured muscle-conditioning program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive treatment planning |
| Control System | LCD interface | Simple setting and program management |
Treatment settings should always be selected according to user suitability, individual tolerance, and the supplied operating instructions.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal muscles to support muscle conditioning and midsection definition.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other suitable areas of the legs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock toning and shaping
-
Inner-thigh muscle conditioning
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Lower-body definition
Arms and Calves
The system can also support targeted muscle stimulation for smaller treatment areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Biceps stimulation
-
Triceps conditioning
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Calf muscle toning
Professional Body-Sculpting Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Suitable Program |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Muscle-conditioning program |
| Waist | Improve the appearance of body contours | Body-contouring program |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape enhancement | Muscle or multi-area program |
| Inner Thighs | Muscle conditioning and leg definition | Body-contouring program |
| Outer Thighs | Hip and thigh contouring | Multi-area program |
| Upper Arms | Biceps and triceps stimulation | Muscle-conditioning program |
| Calves | Lower-leg muscle conditioning | Muscle-conditioning program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and possible contraindications. Explain the expected muscle-contraction sensation and establish realistic treatment objectives.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Choose the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the selected muscle groups. Ensure correct skin contact and avoid prohibited treatment areas.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate stimulation frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a low intensity and increase it progressively according to the client’s comfort and muscle response.
Step 4: EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled electrical impulses for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences repeated muscle contractions within the selected treatment area.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program, and the applicators are removed. Inspect the treatment area and provide any appropriate post-treatment recommendations.
Designed for Professional and Personal Treatment Environments
The EMS Sculpting Machine combines customizable body-toning functions with straightforward operation and portable construction.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology
-
Multiple body-treatment applicators
-
Adjustable stimulation frequency
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
Treatments for five or more body areas
-
Clear LCD control interface
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Skin-contact sensors
-
Overload protection
-
Lightweight, portable construction
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Customer training and technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | Electrical Muscle Stimulation |
| Stimulation Frequency | Adjustable |
| Intensity Levels | Levels 1–10 |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple applicators for different body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly two sessions per week |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves |
| Display | Clear LCD control interface |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, skin-contact sensors, and overload protection |
| Power Input | AC 110V or 220V |
| Design | Lightweight and portable |
| Suitable Environments | Salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and home use |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Customer training and technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine
-
Multiple EMS treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Adjustable intensity controls
-
Integrated LCD control interface
-
Standard machine accessories
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
The final number and configuration of treatment applicators should follow the selected product package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety instructions
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Body-contouring protocol guidance
-
Client consultation materials
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMS Sculpting Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved users operate the system correctly.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
LCD interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Stimulation-frequency adjustment
-
Intensity-level selection
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Safety procedures and contraindications
-
Applicator cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A client consultation and health-history review should be completed before professional treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied instructions.
Treatment may not be suitable for users with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery in the selected area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Neurological conditions affecting sensation
-
Severe skin sensitivity
-
Medical conditions affected by electrical stimulation
Do not position applicators over the heart, head, front or side of the neck, spine, broken skin, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Users with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Begin every new treatment at a low intensity.
-
Increase the intensity gradually according to comfort.
-
Ensure correct applicator contact before activation.
-
Do not place applicators over prohibited body areas.
-
Inspect applicators and cables before every session.
-
Clean the applicators between professional clients.
-
Keep the machine in a clean, dry environment.
-
Stop treatment if unusual pain or discomfort occurs.
-
Follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness centers
-
Fitness and recovery facilities
-
Professional spas
-
Home-based beauty businesses
-
Aesthetic treatment facilities
The machine may also be suitable for personal use when operated according to the supplied manual. Professional services must comply with applicable local licensing, insurance, and operating requirements.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine?
Targeted Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to selected muscle groups, supporting structured muscle-conditioning and toning programs.
Adjustable Intensity Levels
Ten intensity levels allow users to begin comfortably and increase muscle stimulation progressively according to individual tolerance.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves using suitable applicator placement.
Portable and Easy to Operate
The lightweight design, clear LCD interface, and straightforward controls make the system suitable for professional facilities and approved personal use.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, training, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMS Sculpting Machine?
It is an Electrical Muscle Stimulation system that delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles for body-toning and muscle-conditioning programs.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the selected body area and treatment protocol.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, biceps, triceps, and calves.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice per week. The final course should be personalized according to individual suitability and objectives.
What does EMS treatment feel like?
Users typically experience repeated muscle contractions, tingling, or pulsing sensations. The intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to comfort.
Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The system provides ten adjustable intensity levels and customizable stimulation-frequency settings.
Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system uses external applicators and does not require injections, incisions, or surgery.
Can EMS replace regular exercise?
EMS treatments should complement rather than replace regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
Can the machine directly remove fat?
The primary function of the system is electrical muscle stimulation. Improved muscle tone may support a more defined appearance, but individual body-composition changes vary and should not be guaranteed.
Can it be used at home?
The supplied information indicates suitability for home use. Users must follow the operating manual, observe all contraindications, and begin at a low intensity.
Are results the same for every user?
No. Results vary according to the treatment area, selected intensity, number of sessions, muscle condition, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is training included?
Yes. Machine operation, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, safety instructions, cleaning, maintenance, and technical support are included.
Add Professional EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine enables salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and body-contouring professionals to introduce customizable muscle-conditioning and body-toning services.
Five key benefits:
-
Targeted Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology
-
Multiple applicators for five or more body areas
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
Portable design with a clear LCD interface
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation System
Ultrasonic Cavitation and Radiofrequency for Body Contouring
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine is a multifunctional body-contouring platform developed for beauty salons, aesthetic spas, wellness clinics and professional body-sculpting studios.
The system combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary treatment functions for customized body-contouring, skin-firming, cellulite-appearance and body-care programs.
Multiple treatment applicators and adjustable intensity settings allow trained practitioners to create protocols for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, upper arms, hips, back, waist and suitable face and neck areas.
Six treatment functions | Ultrasonic cavitation | Radiofrequency | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Body-Contouring Platform
Ultrasonic Cavitation
The Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable localized body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank programs
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Hip and back treatments
-
General body-contouring services
Radiofrequency Skin Firming
The RF function delivers controlled thermal energy for professional skin-firming and texture-refinement programs.
Common applications include:
-
Loose-looking body skin
-
Skin-firming support
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Suitable facial protocols
-
General rejuvenation services
Cellulite-Appearance and Texture Care
The system’s combined technologies can be incorporated into professional programs for uneven-looking body texture.
Common applications include:
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Hips
-
Abdomen
-
Other professionally assessed body areas
Circulation and Drainage Support
Complementary treatment functions support professionally planned massage and circulation-focused body-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Temporary water-retention support
-
Post-cavitation massage
-
General circulation-focused wellness
-
Body-care treatments
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Maintenance-oriented programs
The appropriate technology, applicator, energy level and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized body-contouring pathways using one or more of its six functions.
Program 1: Abdomen and Waist Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable localized areas around the abdomen and waist.
Recommended technologies:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency
-
Complementary Body-Care Functions
-
Post-Treatment Massage
Recommended for:
-
Upper abdomen
-
Lower abdomen
-
Waistline
-
Flanks and side body
Program 2: Thigh and Cellulite Appearance
A lower-body program designed for suitable inner- and outer-thigh concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency
-
Texture-Refinement Function
-
Circulation-Support Treatment
Recommended for:
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
Program 3: Arms, Back and Hips
A customizable program for smaller or contoured body zones.
Recommended technologies:
-
Suitable Cavitation Applicator
-
Radiofrequency
-
Complementary Massage Function
-
Customized Lower-Intensity Settings
Recommended for:
-
Upper arms
-
Upper and lower back
-
Hips
-
Bra-line areas
Program 4: Face and Neck Firming
A gentler professional program using applicators and settings intended for suitable facial and neck areas.
Recommended technologies:
-
Suitable RF Applicator
-
Gentle Skin-Firming Program
-
Customized Low-Intensity Settings
-
Professional Facial Protocol
Recommended for:
-
Facial-contour refinement
-
Jawline treatments
-
Suitable neck areas
-
General skin-firming support
Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation System provides adjustable intensity settings for different technologies and treatment areas.
| Treatment Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Intensity | First-time clients and smaller treatment areas |
| Moderate Intensity | General professional body-contouring treatments |
| Higher Intensity | Appropriately selected body areas and experienced clients |
| Customized Program | Technology-specific settings based on professional assessment |
The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over cavitation energy, RF intensity and client comfort.
New clients should begin with conservative settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatment of multiple body and facial zones.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
-
Bra-line areas
-
Waist
-
Flanks
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Legs
Face and Neck Treatments
-
Suitable cheek areas
-
Jawline
-
Lower face
-
Appropriate neck areas
-
Other professionally assessed facial zones
Professional Body and Facial Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, applicator, energy setting and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Technology | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Cavitation and RF | Body-contour refinement |
| Waist and flanks | Cavitation and RF | Waist-contouring support |
| Inner and outer thighs | Cavitation and RF | Lower-body and texture care |
| Buttocks | RF and complementary functions | Firming and cellulite-appearance support |
| Upper arms | Cavitation or RF | Targeted body-care programs |
| Back and hips | Cavitation and RF | Localized contour refinement |
| Face and jawline | Suitable RF Applicator | Facial-contour programs |
| Neck | Suitable RF Applicator | Professional firming support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, treatment goals, body condition, target areas and contraindications.
2. Technology and Applicator Selection
The appropriate treatment applicators are selected according to the treatment area and intended body-contouring program.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the cavitation intensity, RF energy and other available settings according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol.
4. Multi-Technology Treatment
The selected technologies are applied in the appropriate sequence. A typical professional treatment lasts approximately 60 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the areas are assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur depending on the selected technology and intensity.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines six treatment functions with digital controls and multiple applicators for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency Skin Firming
-
Six integrated treatment functions
-
Multiple treatment applicators
-
Adjustable intensity levels
-
LCD control interface
-
Preset treatment modes
-
Dual-voltage compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional body-contouring system |
| Number of Functions | Six |
| Primary Technologies | Ultrasonic Cavitation and Radiofrequency |
| Additional Functions | Four complementary body-care modalities |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple heads for different body areas and functions |
| Session Duration | Approximately 60 minutes |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, thighs, buttocks, arms, hips, back, waist, face and neck |
| Intensity Levels | Adjustable |
| Control Interface | LCD screen with professional controls |
| Power Supply | 110V and 220V |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, client-safety sensors and overload protection |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and customer assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, treatment applicators and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation main unit
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation Handle
-
Radiofrequency Treatment Handle
-
Complementary treatment applicators
-
Handle-connection components
-
Required treatment accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup
-
Cavitation operation
-
RF-energy selection
-
Treatment-area guidance
-
Multi-technology sequencing
-
Client consultation guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
LCD control operation
-
Treatment-handle installation
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation operation
-
Radiofrequency settings
-
Applicator selection
-
Body-area assessment
-
Face and neck precautions
-
Multi-technology treatment sequencing
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
LCD control system
-
Cavitation-generation components
-
Radiofrequency components
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle and cable connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-handle operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of accessories and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cavitation and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Severe cardiovascular or vascular conditions
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe liver or kidney conditions
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Recent surgery
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Cavitation must not be applied over the head, heart, breasts, kidneys, liver, reproductive organs, bone surfaces or other prohibited areas.
RF energy and cavitation intensity must be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and client tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Qualified aesthetic professionals
-
Businesses expanding their body-treatment services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine?
Combine Six Treatment Functions
The system combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary body-care functions in one professional platform.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Multiple applicators support professional protocols for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, arms, hips, back, waist and suitable facial areas.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity and technology selection allow treatments to be adapted to the client’s condition and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports body-contouring, skin-firming, cellulite-appearance, texture-refinement and suitable face and neck programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does ultrasonic cavitation work?
The Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable localized body areas for professionally planned contour-refinement programs.
How does radiofrequency complement cavitation?
Radiofrequency provides controlled thermal energy for skin-firming support and texture-refinement treatments.
What makes this a six-in-one system?
The machine combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary professional body-care functions.
Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, thighs, buttocks, upper arms, back, hips and selected face or neck areas using appropriate applicators.
How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 60 minutes. Treatment duration varies according to the number of areas and technologies selected.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional treatment course may include approximately 8–12 sessions. The final number and interval depend on client condition, treatment area and professional assessment.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients may feel vibration or an audible tone during cavitation and warmth during RF treatment. Settings should remain within the client’s comfort level.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
Are results permanent?
No permanent body-contouring outcome should be guaranteed. Results vary, and remaining fat cells can change size with future weight gain.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers cavitation, RF, applicator selection, treatment sequencing, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add 6-in-1 Cavitation to Your Body-Contouring Business
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine combines:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency Skin Firming
-
Six integrated treatment functions
-
Professional body and facial applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and customer support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment functions, applicators and professional training.
Order Your 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$2,499.00
Sistem profesional de îngrijire facială 17-în-1
Șaptesprezece tehnologii pentru tratamente faciale și de îngrijire a pielii personalizate
Aparatul de îngrijire facială 17-în-1 este o platformă profesională multifuncțională, dezvoltată pentru saloane de înfrumusețare, spa-uri medicale, clinici de îngrijire a pielii, centre de dermatologie și academii de frumusețe.
Sistemul combină 17 tehnologii faciale pentru curățare, exfoliere, hidratare, îndepărtarea punctelor negre, tonifierea pielii, aplicarea produselor, îngrijirea pielii predispuse la acnee și rejuvenarea feței.
Ecranul său tactil modern, capetele de tratament interschimbabile, setările profesionale ajustabile și designul cu cărucior pe roți permit practicienilor să creeze protocoale personalizate pentru diferite tipuri și probleme ale pielii.
Șaptesprezece tehnologii faciale | Mai multe capete de tratament | Ecran tactil profesional | Garanție de trei ani
Șaptesprezece tehnologii pe o singură platformă profesională
Dispozitiv de exfoliere a pielii
Dispozitivul Skin Scrubber utilizează vibrații ultrasonice pentru a facilita curățarea suprafeței și îndepărtarea impurităților cutanate desprinse.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Curățarea porilor
-
Exfolierea suprafeței
-
Îndepărtarea sebumului și a impurităților
-
Pregătirea pentru îngrijirea pielii
-
Programe pentru tenul gras
-
Curățare facială generală
Bule de oxigen
Funcția Oxygen Bubble facilitează programe faciale profesionale axate pe curățare, revigorare și hidratare.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Revigorarea pielii
-
Curățare delicată a suprafeței
-
Susținerea hidratării
-
Piele cu aspect tern
-
Pregătirea feței
-
Condiționarea generală a pielii
RF bipolară
Mânerul RF bipolar furnizează energie de radiofrecvență controlată pentru programe profesionale de tonifiere a pielii.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Suport pentru tonifierea pielii
-
Aspectul liniilor fine
-
Piele cu aspect matur
-
Rejuvenarea feței
-
Tratamente axate pe elasticitate
-
Servicii generale antiîmbătrânire
Curățare cu bule
Funcția de curățare cu bule asigură un tratament de curățare facială spumant pentru tipurile de piele adecvate.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Programe de curățare profundă
-
Piele cu aspect congestionat
-
Îngrijirea pielii grase
-
Tratamente pentru îngrijirea porilor
-
Pregătirea feței
-
Purificarea generală a pielii
Pulverizare la presiune înaltă
Mânerul pentru pulverizare de înaltă presiune produce o ceață fină de lichid pentru hidratare și aplicarea soluțiilor cosmetice.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Hidratarea pielii
-
Răcorire și revigorare
-
Aplicarea soluțiilor faciale
-
Ten cu aspect tern
-
Îngrijire post-curățare
-
Condiționarea generală a pielii
Microdermabraziune cu diamant
Microdermabraziunea cu diamant asigură exfoliere mecanică controlată, folosind capete interschimbabile cu diamant.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Lustruirea suprafeței pielii
-
Textură cu aspect neuniform
-
Piele cu aspect aspru
-
Ten tern
-
Pregătirea feței
-
Exfoliere profesională
Terapie cu ultrasunete
Mânerul Ultrasonic facilitează masajul facial profesional și aplicarea produselor cosmetice.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Suport pentru aplicarea produselor
-
Masaj facial
-
Tratamente de hidratare
-
Programe de condiționare a pielii
-
Reîntinerire generală
-
Servicii faciale personalizate
Tehnologie cu plasmă
Mânerul Plasma facilitează protocoale de condiționare și rejuvenare a pielii, planificate profesional.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Rejuvenare generală a pielii
-
Programe de rafinare a texturii
-
Îngrijirea tenului predispus la acnee
-
Ten cu aspect tern
-
Tratamente faciale localizate
-
Servicii profesionale personalizate
Microcurenți V-Face
Mânerul pentru microcurenți V-Face asigură stimulare electrică controlată pentru zone faciale adecvate.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Suport pentru tonifierea feței
-
Programe de redefinire a conturului
-
Tratamente pentru linia mandibulară
-
Piele cu aspect matur
-
Condiționare facială generală
-
Servicii profesionale de tonifiere
Ciocan rece
Ciocanul rece oferă o răcire controlată pentru confortul post-tratament și protocoale calmante.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Răcire după tratamentele faciale
-
Roșeață temporară
-
Programe pentru confortul pielii
-
Îngrijire post-extracție
-
Etape finale pentru îngrijirea porilor
-
Finalizarea tratamentului facial
Microneedling electric
Microneedlingul electric creează microcanale controlate pentru programe profesionale de remodelare a pielii.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Textură cu aspect neuniform
-
Aspectul liniilor fine
-
Aspectul cicatricilor de acnee
-
Programe de remodelare a colagenului
-
Reînnoire profesională a pielii
-
Reîntinerire personalizată
Îndepărtarea punctelor negre
Mânerul pentru îndepărtarea punctelor negre oferă o aspirație vacuum țintită pentru zonele faciale congestionate potrivite.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Sprijin pentru îndepărtarea punctelor negre
-
Curățarea zonei T
-
Tratamente pentru îngrijirea porilor
-
Piele cu aspect congestionat
-
Tratamente localizate cu vacuum
-
Protocoale profesionale de extracție
Terapie cu lumină LED
Mânerul LED oferă programe de iluminare selectabile pentru diferite obiective profesionale de îngrijire a pielii.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Programe antirid
-
Îngrijirea tenului predispus la acnee
-
Tratamente de iluminare
-
Protocoale calmante
-
Reîntinerire facială generală
-
Îngrijire post-tratament
Reîntinerire fotonică
Funcția Foton oferă programe suplimentare de îngrijire a pielii pe bază de lumină, pentru probleme faciale potrivite.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Ten cu aspect tern
-
Reîntinerire generală
-
Piele cu aspect matur
-
Programe de iluminare
-
Tratamente de condiționare a pielii
-
Îngrijire profesională de întreținere
Electropulverizare
Funcția Electropulverizare permite aplicarea profesională a lichidelor cosmetice și serurilor compatibile.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Susținerea hidratării
-
Aplicarea soluțiilor cosmetice
-
Programe de condiționare a pielii
-
Îngrijire post-curățare
-
Servicii faciale personalizate
-
Tratamente de întreținere
Măști cu lumină colorată
Funcția Mască cu lumină colorată oferă o acoperire facială extinsă, utilizând moduri de iluminare selectate.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Programe LED pentru întreaga față
-
Tratamente calmante
-
Servicii de iluminare a pielii
-
Îngrijirea tenului predispus la acnee
-
Protocoale antirid
-
Îngrijire facială generală
Integrare multimodală
Sistemul permite practicienilor să combine tehnologiile potrivite într-o secvență de tratament structurată.
Aplicațiile frecvente includ:
-
Programe faciale personalizate
-
Tratamente pentru multiple probleme
-
Pachete de curățare profundă
-
Servicii antirid
-
Programe de hidratare și iluminare
-
Tratamente faciale profesionale complete
Tehnologia, capul de tratament, setările, produsele și durata ședinței adecvate trebuie selectate în funcție de starea pielii clientului, sensibilitate și protocolul profesional.
Selectați programul facial potrivit pentru fiecare client
Sistemul permite protocoale de tratament personalizate, utilizând una sau mai multe dintre cele 17 tehnologii ale sale.
Programul 1: Curățare profundă și îngrijirea porilor
Un program axat pe curățare, destinat tenului gras, congestionat sau predispus la puncte negre.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
Dispozitiv de exfoliere a pielii
-
Bule de oxigen
-
Curățare cu bule
-
Îndepărtarea punctelor negre
-
Ciocan rece
Recomandat pentru:
-
Piele cu aspect congestionat
-
Programe pentru tenul gras
-
Sprijin pentru îndepărtarea punctelor negre
-
Servicii profesionale de îngrijire a porilor
Programul 2: Hidratare și iluminare
Un program axat pe hidratare, conceput pentru a susține un aspect reîmprospătat și radiant al pielii.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
Bule de oxigen
-
Pulverizare la presiune înaltă
-
Terapie cu ultrasunete
-
Electropulverizare
-
Terapie cu lumină LED
Recomandat pentru:
-
Piele cu aspect uscat
-
Ten tern
-
Servicii de iluminare a pielii
-
Tratamente faciale axate pe hidratare
Programul 3: Antirid și fermitate
Un program de reîntinerire pentru pielea cu aspect matur, liniile fine și problemele conturului facial.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
RF bipolară
-
Microcurenți V-Face
-
Microneedling electric
-
Terapie cu lumină LED
-
Reîntinerire fotonică
Recomandat pentru:
-
Piele cu aspect matur
-
Aspectul liniilor fine
-
Programe pentru fermitatea pielii
-
Servicii profesionale de combatere a îmbătrânirii
Programul 4: Îngrijirea pielii cu textură neuniformă și predispusă la acnee
Un program personalizat pentru textura cu aspect neuniform și pielea predispusă la acnee, după caz.
Tehnologii recomandate:
-
Microdermabraziune cu diamant
-
Dispozitiv de exfoliere a pielii
-
Tehnologie cu plasmă
-
Microneedling electric
-
Mască cu lumină colorată
Recomandat pentru:
-
Textură cu aspect neuniform
-
Piele predispusă la acnee
-
Aspectul cicatricilor de acnee
-
Programe profesionale pentru reînnoirea pielii
Setări ajustabile ale tehnologiei pentru tratamente personalizate
Aparatul de îngrijire facială 17-în-1 oferă setări ajustabile pentru tehnologiile sale compatibile de tratament.
| Setarea tratamentului | Aplicare recomandată |
|---|---|
| Setare delicată | Piele cu aspect sensibil și clienți aflați la primul tratament |
| Setare standard | Tratamente faciale profesionale generale |
| Setare avansată | Protocoale intensive selectate corespunzător |
| Setare personalizată | Programe specifice tehnologiei, bazate pe evaluarea profesională |
Comenzile ajustabile oferă practicienilor instruiți o flexibilitate mai mare pentru presiunea vacuumului, energia RF, intensitatea microcurenților, modul de iluminare și durata tratamentului.
Clienții noi ar trebui să înceapă cu setări conservatoare, înainte ca intensitatea tratamentului să fie crescută treptat.
Zone ajustabile pentru tratamente faciale
Capetele de tratament susțin îngrijirea profesională în mai multe zone ale pielii feței și părții superioare a corpului.
Tratamente pentru întreaga față
-
Frunte
-
Obraji
-
Nas
-
Bărbie
-
Linia mandibulei
-
Pielea generală a feței
Tratamente pentru zone delicate
-
Zone adecvate de sub ochi
-
Zona exterioară a ochilor
-
Partea superioară a obrajilor
-
Zona conturului buzelor
-
Alte zone evaluate profesional
Tratamente pentru gât și partea superioară a corpului
-
Gât
-
Decolteu
-
Partea superioară a toracelui
-
Zone adecvate ale mâinilor
-
Alte zone adecvate ale pielii
Aplicații profesionale pentru tratamente faciale și îngrijirea pielii
Tratamentele disponibile depind de tehnologia selectată, capul de tratament, produse, intensitate și protocolul profesional.
| Problemă a pielii | Tehnologie aplicabilă | Aplicarea destinată îngrijirii pielii |
|---|---|---|
| Piele cu aspect congestionat | Spatulă, bule și vacuum | Susținerea curățării profunde |
| Puncte negre și pori vizibili | Îndepărtarea punctelor negre și ciocan rece | Programe pentru îngrijirea porilor |
| Piele cu aspect uscat | Oxigen, spray și electrospray | Îngrijire axată pe hidratare |
| Aspectul liniilor fine | RF, microcurenți sau microneedling | Susținerea combaterii îmbătrânirii |
| Piele predispusă la acnee | Protocoale cu plasmă, LED și radiofrecvență înaltă | Îngrijire clarifiantă a pielii |
| Ten cu aspect tern | Fotoni, LED și spray | Programe de iluminare |
| Textură cu aspect neuniform | Diamant sau microneedling | Programe pentru rafinarea suprafeței pielii |
| Roșeață temporară după tratament | Ciocan rece | Susținerea răcirii și a confortului |
Potrivirea tratamentului și rezultatele așteptate variază de la un client la altul. Înaintea fiecărui tratament trebuie efectuată o consultație completă a pielii.
Cum se desfășoară o ședință facială profesională
1. Consultarea clientului
Practicianul analizează problemele pielii clientului, istoricul tratamentelor, produsele utilizate în prezent, sensibilitatea și contraindicațiile. Apoi sunt selectate tehnologiile adecvate.
2. Pregătirea sistemului
Mânerele, vârfurile, măștile și produsele cosmetice necesare sunt instalate conform manualului de operare. Practicianul verifică dacă toate conexiunile sunt sigure.
3. Selectarea parametrilor
Energia RF, intensitatea microcurenților, nivelul de vacuum, modul de iluminare, profunzimea microneedlingului și ceilalți parametri disponibili sunt selectați în funcție de starea pielii clientului.
4. Tratament facial
Practicianul efectuează pașii faciali selectați în ordinea corespunzătoare. O ședință profesională completă durează, în general, aproximativ 60–90 de minute.
5. Recomandări după tratament
După tratament, pielea este evaluată și se aplică, după caz, o cremă hidratantă și protecție solară adecvate. Clientul primește instrucțiuni personalizate pentru îngrijirea ulterioară.
În funcție de tehnologiile selectate, pot apărea temporar roșeață, uscăciune, sensibilitate, furnicături sau o ușoară umflare.
Conceput pentru medii profesionale de tratament
Sistemul combină 17 tehnologii faciale cu comenzi prin ecran tactil și un design cu cărucior mobil.
Printre principalele avantaje de operare se numără:
-
Șaptesprezece funcții profesionale de tratament
-
Mai multe capete interschimbabile
-
Ecran tactil LCD modern
-
Programe de tratament presetate
-
Setări tehnologice reglabile
-
Aplicații pentru față, gât și decolteu
-
Sisteme de monitorizare a siguranței
-
Design profesional cu cărucior pe roți
Specificații tehnice
| Specificație | Detalii |
|---|---|
| Denumirea produsului | Aparat de îngrijire facială 17-în-1 |
| Tipul produsului | Sistem facial profesional multifuncțional |
| Numărul de tehnologii | 17 |
| Tehnologii principale | Curățare, RF, microcurenți, ultrasunete, plasmă, microneedling, vacuum și LED |
| Capete de tratament | Mai multe capete profesionale interschimbabile |
| Programe pentru piele | Protocoale pentru piele sensibilă, normală, grasă, mixtă, cu pori dilatați și cu puncte negre |
| Interfața afișajului | Ecran tactil LCD modern |
| Durata ședinței | Aproximativ 60–90 de minute |
| Zone de tratament | Față, gât și decolteu |
| Alimentare | 110 V și 220 V |
| Design | Cărucior profesional cu roți |
| Caracteristici de siguranță | Oprire automată, senzori de temperatură, protecție la suprasarcină și intensitate reglabilă |
| Garanție | Garanție de trei ani pentru componente |
| Asistență | Instruire profesională și asistență tehnică |
| Certificate | Certificate CE și ISO |
Ce este inclus?
Pachetul include sistemul principal de control, capete profesionale de tratament și accesoriile necesare pentru operare.
Echipament standard
-
O unitate principală de îngrijire facială 17-în-1
-
Dispozitiv de exfoliere a pielii
-
Componente pentru bule de oxigen
-
Mâner RF bipolar
-
Mâner pentru curățare cu bule
-
Pistol de pulverizare de înaltă presiune
-
Mâner pentru microdermabraziune cu diamant și vârfuri
-
Mâner pentru terapie cu ultrasunete
-
Mâner pentru tratament cu plasmă
-
Mâner V-Face cu microcurenți
-
Ciocan rece
-
Stilou electric pentru microneedling
-
Mâner pentru îndepărtarea punctelor negre
-
Mâner pentru terapie cu lumină LED
-
Componente pentru întinerirea cu fotoni
-
Mâner pentru electropulverizare
-
Mască cu lumină colorată
-
Componente necesare pentru conectare
-
Cablu de alimentare
-
Manual de utilizare în limba engleză
Documentație și instruire
-
Manual de utilizare în limba engleză
-
Instruire profesională la distanță
-
Îndrumări pentru instalarea aparatului
-
Configurarea mânerelor de tratament
-
Îndrumări pentru selectarea tehnologiei
-
Setări pentru radiofrecvență și microcurenți
-
Utilizarea funcțiilor de vid și ultrasunete
-
Selectarea modului de iluminare
-
Îndrumări pentru microneedling
-
Protocoale faciale personalizate
-
Instrucțiuni privind siguranța și contraindicațiile
-
Îndrumări privind curățarea și întreținerea
-
Asistență pentru depanarea de bază
-
Certificat de instruire după finalizare
Instruire profesională și asistență continuă
Instruirea profesională acoperă:
-
Instalarea și configurarea aparatului
-
Navigarea pe ecranul tactil
-
Utilizarea tuturor celor 17 tehnologii
-
Instalarea mânerelor de tratament
-
Evaluarea pielii clientului
-
Selectarea programului de tratament
-
Reglarea radiofrecvenței și a microcurenților
-
Utilizarea ultrasunetelor și a plasmei
-
Setări de vid
-
Programe LED și fotonice
-
Utilizarea aparatului de microneedling
-
Curățare și întreținere de rutină
-
Proceduri de siguranță
-
Depanare de bază
Se eliberează un certificat de instruire profesională după finalizarea cu succes.
Garanție de trei ani
Aparatul de îngrijire facială 17-în-1 beneficiază de o garanție de trei ani pentru piese, oferind protecție pe termen lung pentru investiția dumneavoastră în echipament.
Acoperirea garanției
Sub rezerva condițiilor oficiale de garanție, defectele de fabricație eligibile ale următoarelor componente pot fi acoperite:
-
Unitatea principală a aparatului
-
Componente electronice interne
-
Ecran tactil LCD
-
Pompe interne și componente de control
-
Mânere originale de tratament
-
Componente pentru terapia cu lumină
-
Componente de conectare a mânerelor
-
Alte piese eligibile furnizate împreună cu aparatul
Procesul de asistență tehnică
Dacă apare o problemă tehnică, echipa de asistență va oferi:
-
Inspecție la distanță și identificarea defecțiunii
-
Depanare ghidată
-
Confirmarea componentei afectate
-
Verificarea eligibilității pentru garanție
-
Asistență pentru piesele de schimb acoperite
-
Instrucțiuni de instalare pentru piesele de schimb eligibile
Excluderi din garanție
În mod normal, garanția nu acoperă:
-
Deteriorări accidentale sau estetice
-
Deteriorări cauzate de utilizarea necorespunzătoare
-
Utilizarea incorectă a mânerului de tratament
-
Reparații sau modificări neautorizate
-
Tensiune sau conexiune electrică incorectă
-
Curățare, depozitare sau întreținere necorespunzătoare
-
Uzura normală a vârfurilor, acelor, filtrelor și consumabilelor
-
Deteriorări cauzate de produse incompatibile
-
Blocaje cauzate de curățarea incorectă
-
Transportul sau expedierea organizată fără autorizare
La solicitarea service-ului pot fi necesare detaliile comenzii inițiale, numărul de serie al aparatului, imagini și videoclipuri de diagnosticare.
Acoperirea completă rămâne supusă politicii oficiale de garanție.
Siguranță și contraindicații
Acest sistem este un echipament facial profesional și trebuie utilizat numai de personal instruit corespunzător.
Înainte de tratament trebuie efectuate o consultație cutanată completă și o evaluare a contraindicațiilor.
Eligibilitatea tratamentului depinde de tehnologia selectată. Unele funcții pot să nu fie potrivite pentru clienții cu:
-
Sarcină sau suspiciune de sarcină
-
Stimulatoare cardiace sau dispozitive electronice implantate
-
Implanturi metalice în zona feței
-
Cancer activ
-
Herpes simplex activ
-
Răni deschise sau infecții cutanate active
-
Acnee inflamatorie severă
-
Arsuri solare severe
-
Intervenție chirurgicală recentă
-
Tratamente injectabile recente
-
Tratamente recente cu laser sau peelinguri chimice recente
-
Fotosensibilitate sau administrarea de medicamente fotosensibilizante
-
Tulburări de coagulare
-
Vindecare deficitară a rănilor
-
Sensibilitate cutanată redusă
-
Alte contraindicații menționate în manualul de utilizare
Vârfurile pentru microneedling trebuie manipulate în conformitate cu cerințele profesionale de igienă și control al infecțiilor.
Energia RF, microcurenții, ultrasunetele, plasma, vacuumul, intensitatea luminii și profunzimea microneedlingului trebuie selectate în funcție de starea pielii și toleranța clientului.
Aceasta nu este o listă exhaustivă a contraindicațiilor. Operatorii trebuie să respecte manualul de utilizare, standardele profesionale aplicabile și reglementările locale. Trebuie solicitat sfatul medical ori de câte ori există incertitudini privind eligibilitatea clientului.
Utilizatori profesionali vizați
Acest sistem este potrivit pentru:
-
Saloane de înfrumusețare
-
Spa-uri profesionale
-
Clinici de îngrijire a pielii
-
Spa-uri medicale
-
Centre de dermatologie
-
Academii de frumusețe
-
Specialiști în tratamente faciale
-
Esteticieni
-
Specialiști independenți instruiți
Acest aparat nu este destinat utilizării casnice de către persoane neinstruite sau ocazionale.
De ce să alegeți aparatul facial 17-în-1?
Accesați șaptesprezece tehnologii faciale
O singură platformă profesională oferă curățare, exfoliere, hidratare, radiofrecvență, microcurenți, ultrasunete, plasmă, microneedling, vacuum și terapie cu lumină.
Creați programe faciale personalizate
Specialiștii pot combina tehnologiile potrivite pentru servicii de curățare profundă, hidratare, antiîmbătrânire, îngrijire a acneei, iluminare și rafinare a texturii.
Tratați diferite tipuri de piele
Capetele interschimbabile și setările ajustabile permit protocoale personalizate pentru piele sensibilă, normală, grasă, mixtă și cu pori dilatați.
Îmbunătățiți fluxul de lucru profesional
Interfața cu ecran tactil, programele presetate și designul cu cărucior mobil contribuie la tratamente organizate și eficiente.
Protejați-vă investiția
Sistemul include o garanție de trei ani pentru piese, certificate CE și ISO, instruire profesională și asistență tehnică.
Întrebări frecvente
Ce tehnologii sunt incluse?
Sistemul include exfolierea pielii, oxigenare cu bule, RF bipolar, curățare cu bule, pulverizare de înaltă presiune, microdermabraziune cu diamant, ultrasunete, plasmă, microcurent V-Face, ciocan rece, microneedling electric, îndepărtarea punctelor negre, LED, foto-rejuvenare, pulverizare electrolizată, măști cu lumină colorată și integrare multimodală.
Cât durează un tratament facial profesional?
Un tratament facial complet obișnuit durează aproximativ 60–90 de minute. Durata depinde de tehnologiile selectate și de nevoile clientului.
Tratamentele pot fi personalizate?
Da. Specialiștii pot selecta și combina tehnologiile adecvate în funcție de tipul de piele, sensibilitatea și obiectivele de tratament ale clientului.
Este sistemul potrivit pentru pielea sensibilă?
Pentru unii clienți cu piele sensibilă pot fi selectate capete mai delicate și setări mai reduse. Totuși, fiecare client necesită o evaluare profesională înainte de tratament.
Poate sistemul susține tratamentele pentru acnee și puncte negre?
Spatula pentru curățarea pielii, curățarea cu bule, îndepărtarea punctelor negre și funcțiile LED sau Plasma adecvate pot fi integrate în protocoale profesionale de curățare și îngrijire a porilor.
Care este diferența dintre RF și microcurent?
RF furnizează energie termică controlată pentru susținerea fermității pielii. Microcurentul oferă stimulare electrică de intensitate redusă pentru programe profesionale de tonifiere facială.
Există timp de recuperare?
Recuperarea depinde de tehnologiile selectate și de intensitatea tratamentului. Pot apărea temporar roșeață, uscăciune, sensibilitate sau o ușoară umflare.
Este inclusă instruirea profesională?
Instruirea profesională acoperă configurarea aparatului, toate cele 17 tehnologii, programele de tratament, siguranța, curățarea și întreținerea. Se oferă un certificat de instruire.
Ce acoperă garanția de trei ani?
Garanția de trei ani pentru componente acoperă defectele de fabricație eligibile care afectează componentele aprobate ale aparatului, în conformitate cu politica oficială de garanție. Consumabilele, daunele accidentale, utilizarea necorespunzătoare și modificările neautorizate sunt excluse.
Aparatul include certificatele CE și ISO?
Sunt incluse certificatele CE și ISO.
Adaugă îngrijirea facială completă 17 în 1 la afacerea ta
Aparatul de îngrijire facială 17 în 1 combină:
-
Șaptesprezece tehnologii profesionale de tratament
-
Mai multe capete de tratament interschimbabile
-
Ecran tactil modern și cărucior mobil
-
Programe personalizabile pentru îngrijirea feței și a pielii
-
Garanție de trei ani pentru componente și asistență profesională
Contactează Wikbeauty pentru a comanda aparatul sau pentru a primi mai multe informații despre tehnologiile de tratament, conținutul pachetului și instruirea profesională.
Comandă aparatul de îngrijire facială 17 în 1 și solicită prețul
Receives in 8 days.
$1,349.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Body Wellness System
Five Massage Heads for Customized Relaxation and Body-Care Treatments
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is a professional massage and wellness platform developed for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring studios and wellness clinics.
The system combines adjustable vibration and percussion therapy with five interchangeable massage heads. An optional 40K vacuum-heating function supports additional professional body-care and contouring programs.
Its digital controls, ergonomic treatment handpiece and portable wheeled design allow trained operators to customize treatments for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders.
Vibration and percussion therapy | Five massage heads | Optional 40K vacuum heating | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Massage Platform
Vibration Massage
The vibration function delivers rapid mechanical movements to suitable muscles and body tissue.
Common applications include:
-
General body massage
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Tired-muscle treatments
-
Body-wellness programs
-
Post-workout support
-
Maintenance-oriented massage
Percussion Therapy
The percussion function provides controlled repetitive movement for professional massage and recovery programs.
Common applications include:
-
Localized muscle tension
-
Larger muscle groups
-
Back and shoulder treatments
-
Thigh and leg massage
-
Fitness-recovery programs
-
General relaxation
Circulation and Drainage Support
Mechanical vibration can be incorporated into professionally planned circulation and fluid-movement programs.
Common applications include:
-
Tired-leg treatments
-
General circulation support
-
Temporary water-retention programs
-
Body-care services
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Wellness-maintenance sessions
Optional 40K Vacuum Heating
The optional 40K vacuum-heating configuration combines suction and controlled warmth with the base massage platform.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Body-contour refinement
-
Skin-firming support
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Circulation-focused body care
-
Combination contouring services
The appropriate treatment head, vibration intensity, vacuum level, temperature and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customizable massage, recovery and body-care programs.
Program 1: Relaxation and Wellness
A comfort-focused vibration program for general body massage and relaxation.
Recommended applications:
-
General relaxation
-
Stress-relief programs
-
Tired-muscle massage
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness
Recommended for:
-
Spa clients
-
Fatigued professionals
-
First-time clients
-
General wellness programs
Program 2: Muscle Recovery
A percussion-focused program for suitable muscle groups and post-workout support.
Recommended applications:
-
Back and shoulder massage
-
Thigh and leg treatments
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Localized muscle tension
Recommended for:
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Athletes
-
Sports-recovery clients
-
Wellness-center members
Program 3: Body Shaping Support
A customized vibration program for suitable body-contouring and skin-texture concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Cellulite-appearance support
Recommended for:
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic wellness clinics
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body care
Program 4: Vacuum-Heating Body Care
An optional program combining vibration, vacuum suction and controlled heating.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and waist
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Upper arms
Recommended for:
-
Advanced body-care packages
-
Cellulite-appearance treatments
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Clinics combining multiple contouring technologies
Five Massage Heads for Customized Treatments
Five interchangeable heads provide different coverage patterns and massage sensations.
| Massage Head | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Round Head | General massage and medium-sized body areas |
| Spiked Head | More intensive stimulation for suitable muscle groups |
| Flat Head | Broader coverage for the back, thighs and abdomen |
| Textured Head | Localized muscle tension and customized massage |
| Specialty Head | Targeted treatment according to professional protocol |
The interchangeable heads allow operators to adapt the treatment pattern to the selected body area and client comfort.
New clients should begin with a lower vibration intensity before the setting is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The treatment handpiece and interchangeable heads support professional massage across multiple body areas.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Neck muscles
-
Shoulders
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Suitable side-body areas
Core and Lower-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Lower legs
-
Calves
Full-Body Wellness Programs
-
General relaxation
-
Muscle-recovery support
-
Circulation-focused massage
-
Body-care treatments
-
Post-workout wellness
-
Maintenance-oriented services
Professional Wellness and Body-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected head, vibration intensity, optional vacuum and heating settings and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Treatment Head | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Neck and shoulders | Round or Textured Head | Muscle-relaxation support |
| Back | Flat or Round Head | Broad-area massage |
| Upper arms | Round or Specialty Head | Massage and body-care support |
| Abdomen | Flat Head | General body-contouring support |
| Thighs | Flat or Spiked Head | Massage and texture-refinement support |
| Legs and calves | Round or Textured Head | Tired-muscle relaxation |
| Buttocks | Flat or Specialty Head | Body-care and massage programs |
| Localized muscle areas | Textured or Specialty Head | Targeted professional treatment |
Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, target areas, muscle condition, comfort level and contraindications.
2. Treatment-Head Selection
The appropriate massage head is selected and installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure.
3. Parameter Selection
Vibration intensity, treatment duration and optional vacuum or heating settings are selected according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol.
4. Massage Treatment
The operator moves the treatment handpiece across the selected body area using controlled pressure and the recommended technique. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per area.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the treatment area is assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or mild muscle fatigue may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines adjustable vibration with five massage heads and portable professional controls.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Vibration and percussion massage
-
Five interchangeable treatment heads
-
Multiple adjustable intensity levels
-
Optional 40K vacuum heating
-
Digital touchscreen or control panel
-
Ergonomic treatment handpiece
-
Portable wheeled design
-
Dual-voltage compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Vibration Massage Slimming Machine |
| Product Type | Professional vibration massage and body-wellness system |
| Primary Technology | Vibration and percussion therapy |
| Optional Technology | 40K vacuum heating |
| Massage Heads | Five interchangeable heads |
| Head Types | Round, spiked, flat, textured and specialty |
| Vibration Intensity | Multiple adjustable levels |
| Session Duration | Approximately 15–20 minutes per area |
| Treatment Areas | Arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders |
| Control Interface | Digital touchscreen or control panel |
| Power Supply | 110V and 220V |
| Design | Ergonomic handpiece with optional wheeled cart |
| Portability | Lightweight and movable |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, overheat protection and intensity controls |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and customer assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main machine, treatment handpiece, five massage heads and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Vibration Massage Slimming Machine
-
One professional treatment handpiece
-
One Round Massage Head
-
One Spiked Massage Head
-
One Flat Massage Head
-
One Textured Massage Head
-
One Specialty Massage Head
-
Head-connection components
-
Optional vacuum-heating accessories for the selected model
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-head installation
-
Head-selection guidance
-
Vibration-intensity adjustment
-
Vacuum and heating guidance where applicable
-
Body-area treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Control-panel operation
-
Treatment-handpiece use
-
Installation of all five massage heads
-
Head selection by body area
-
Vibration-intensity adjustment
-
Optional vacuum operation
-
Optional heating controls
-
Client positioning
-
Professional massage protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital control system
-
Original treatment handpiece
-
Vibration and percussion components
-
Optional vacuum and heating components
-
Handpiece-connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-head installation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of treatment heads and consumable components
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Deep-vein thrombosis
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe varicose veins in the treatment area
-
Recent fractures
-
Severe osteoporosis
-
Acute inflammation or fever
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Recent surgery
-
Herniated discs or severe spinal conditions
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The device must not be applied directly over the head, front or side of the neck, spine, kidneys, open wounds, acute injuries or other prohibited areas.
Optional vacuum and heat settings require additional assessment of skin condition, circulation and heat sensitivity.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Fitness and recovery facilities
-
Massage professionals
-
Aesthetic centers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Vibration Massage Slimming Machine?
Access Five Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads allow operators to customize treatment coverage and massage sensation for different body areas.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional massage for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck muscles and shoulders.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable vibration intensity and optional vacuum-heating settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, muscle-recovery, body-care, cellulite-appearance and complementary contouring programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does vibration massage work?
The machine delivers rapid mechanical vibration and percussion through the selected massage head. Intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort.
What are the five massage heads used for?
The Round Head supports general massage, the Spiked Head provides more intensive stimulation, the Flat Head covers larger areas, the Textured Head supports localized massage and the Specialty Head is used for targeted protocols.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the shoulders, back, upper arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, legs and calves.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per body area. Treating multiple areas may require additional time.
Can the machine be used for relaxation only?
Yes. The system can be used for general muscle relaxation, stress-relief and professional wellness massage without including body-contouring protocols.
What is the optional 40K vacuum-heating function?
The optional configuration combines vacuum suction and controlled heating with vibration massage for additional body-care and contour-refinement programs.
Can it be combined with other body treatments?
The machine may be incorporated into professionally planned packages with suitable cavitation, RF or body-contouring services.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Vibration intensity is adjustable. Clients should feel controlled mechanical stimulation without pain. Settings should be reduced or treatment stopped if discomfort occurs.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, treatment heads, intensity settings, optional vacuum heating, body protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine combines:
-
Adjustable vibration and percussion therapy
-
Five interchangeable massage heads
-
Optional 40K vacuum heating
-
Professional relaxation and body-care applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and customer support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment heads, optional vacuum configuration and professional training.
Order Your Vibration Massage Slimming Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$1,999.00
Professional Cold Fusional Plasma System
Ten Interchangeable Probes for Customized Skin-Care Treatments
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is a portable professional skin-care platform developed for dermatology clinics, medical spas, anti-aging centers and advanced beauty studios.
The system combines adjustable cold plasma technology with 10 interchangeable probe heads for surface treatments, localized applications, broader coverage and customized scar-appearance and skin-rejuvenation protocols.
Two multifunctional handles, a digital touchscreen, foot-switch operation and dedicated accessory racks support organized and efficient professional treatments.
Cold plasma technology | Ten interchangeable probes | Two treatment handles | Three-year warranty
Ten Interchangeable Probes on One Professional Platform
Plasma Spray
The Plasma Spray Head provides broad, non-contact plasma application across suitable surface skin areas.
Common applications include:
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Dull-looking skin
-
Surface skin conditioning
-
Complexion-care programs
-
Broad facial applications
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Square Tube Head
The Square Tube Head is designed for controlled treatment of broader skin areas.
Common applications include:
-
Cheeks
-
Forehead
-
Neck
-
Décolletage
-
Broad texture concerns
-
General skin-conditioning protocols
Flared Tube Head
The Flared Tube Head provides graduated plasma application across selected treatment zones.
Common applications include:
-
Medium-sized facial areas
-
Surface skin care
-
Customized intensity programs
-
General rejuvenation
-
Texture-refinement treatments
-
Professional maintenance care
Small Roller Needle
The Small Roller Needle supports professionally planned treatments for smaller areas and localized skin concerns.
Common applications include:
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Small scar areas
-
Localized texture concerns
-
Precision skin-renewal programs
-
Selected facial zones
-
Customized professional protocols
Large Roller Needle
The Large Roller Needle provides wider coverage for professionally selected scar and texture treatments.
Common applications include:
-
Larger scar areas
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Broader skin-renewal programs
-
Body scar appearance
-
Professionally assessed treatment zones
-
Customized advanced protocols
44P Pin Head
The 44P Pin Head provides multi-point contact for broader professional skin-care applications.
Common applications include:
-
General skin stimulation
-
Texture-refinement programs
-
Broad facial areas
-
Skin-conditioning treatments
-
Complexion-care programs
-
Customized rejuvenation
Ozone Plasma Head
The Ozone Plasma Head supports suitable professional cleansing and skin-conditioning protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Clarifying treatments
-
Surface skin conditioning
-
Post-cleansing care
-
Customized professional services
Diamond-Shaped Head
The Diamond-Shaped Head is designed for controlled treatment of selected texture concerns and contoured areas.
Common applications include:
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Surface skin refinement
-
Localized treatment zones
-
Contour-area applications
-
General rejuvenation
-
Professional smoothing protocols
Curved Needle Head
The Curved Needle Head supports precision treatment of contoured or difficult-to-reach areas.
Common applications include:
-
Curved facial zones
-
Localized scar appearance
-
Precision texture treatments
-
Small treatment areas
-
Contour-focused protocols
-
Detailed professional work
Straight Needle Head
The Straight Needle Head is designed for precise localized plasma application.
Common applications include:
-
Individual treatment points
-
Small scar areas
-
Localized skin imperfections
-
Precision professional protocols
-
Targeted texture concerns
-
Detailed skin-care applications
The appropriate probe, intensity, contact method and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area and professional protocol.
Select the Right Probe Combination for Each Client
The system supports customized treatment pathways using one or more of its 10 probes.
Program 1: General Skin Rejuvenation
A broad-treatment program for dull-looking skin and general complexion care.
Recommended probes:
-
Plasma Spray
-
Square Tube Head
-
Flared Tube Head
-
44P Pin Head
Recommended for:
-
Dull-looking skin
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Complexion-care programs
-
Professional maintenance treatments
Program 2: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision program for suitable facial lines and localized aging concerns.
Recommended probes:
-
Plasma Spray
-
Small Roller Needle
-
Curved Needle Head
-
Straight Needle Head
Recommended for:
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Forehead areas
-
Suitable eye-contour areas
-
Localized anti-aging programs
Program 3: Scar Appearance and Texture
A customized program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture.
Recommended probes:
-
Small Roller Needle
-
Large Roller Needle
-
Diamond-Shaped Head
-
Straight Needle Head
Recommended for:
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Localized skin-renewal programs
Program 4: Acne-Prone and Oily Skin
A clarifying program for suitable acne-prone and oily skin.
Recommended probes:
-
Plasma Spray
-
Ozone Plasma Head
-
Square Tube Head
-
44P Pin Head
Recommended for:
-
Acne-prone skin
-
Oily-looking skin
-
Clarifying programs
-
Professional skin-conditioning services
Precision Probe Selection for Customized Treatments
Ten probes provide different coverage patterns for surface, localized and broader professional treatments.
| Probe Category | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Spray and Tube Probes | Surface skin care and broader treatment coverage |
| Roller Probes | Professionally selected scar and texture protocols |
| Multi-Pin Probe | Broad multi-point skin-conditioning treatments |
| Ozone Plasma Probe | Clarifying and acne-prone skin-care programs |
| Precision Needle Probes | Localized and contoured treatment areas |
| Diamond-Shaped Probe | Texture-refinement and customized applications |
The adjustable settings and interchangeable probes give trained operators greater control over treatment coverage and intensity.
New clients should begin with conservative settings before intensity or treatment coverage is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatment of multiple facial and body areas.
Facial Treatments
-
Forehead
-
Cheeks
-
Chin
-
Jawline
-
Suitable areas around the eyes
-
General facial skin
Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Neck
-
Décolletage
-
Hands
-
Suitable upper-chest areas
-
Other professionally assessed zones
Scar and Texture Treatments
-
Acne-scar areas
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Localized body scars
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Other professionally assessed concerns
Professional Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected probe, intensity, treatment area and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Probe | Intended Skin-Care Application |
|---|---|---|
| Dull-looking skin | Plasma Spray | General rejuvenation |
| Fine-line appearance | Small Roller or Spray | Anti-aging support |
| Acne-scar appearance | Roller or Precision Probe | Scar-appearance programs |
| Suitable surgical scars | Large Roller or Precision Probe | Texture-refinement support |
| Acne-prone skin | Ozone Plasma Head | Clarifying skin care |
| Uneven-looking texture | Diamond-Shaped or 44P Head | Surface-refinement programs |
| Broader facial areas | Square or Flared Tube | General skin conditioning |
| Contoured areas | Curved Needle Head | Precision professional treatment |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, current products, healing response and contraindications.
2. Probe Selection and Preparation
The appropriate probe is selected and installed according to the operating manual. Reusable components are cleaned and disinfected, while single-use components are prepared according to infection-control requirements.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the plasma intensity, operating method and session duration according to the treatment area, probe and client tolerance.
4. Cold Plasma Treatment
The selected probe is applied using the appropriate professional technique. A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and appropriate moisturizer, sunscreen or other aftercare products are recommended.
Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or other short-term responses may occur depending on the probe and treatment intensity.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 10 interchangeable probes with two handles and digital controls for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Cold fusional plasma technology
-
Ten interchangeable probes
-
Two multifunctional treatment handles
-
Digital touchscreen control
-
Adjustable treatment intensity
-
Foot-switch operation
-
Two accessory racks
-
Portable and compact design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Cold Fusional Plasma Machine |
| Product Type | Portable professional cold plasma system |
| Technology | Cold fusional plasma |
| Probe Heads | 10 interchangeable probes |
| Main Handles | Two multifunctional handles |
| Treatment Duration | Approximately 5–10 minutes per area |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, décolletage, hands and suitable body scars |
| Primary Applications | Scar appearance, fine lines, texture, acne-prone skin and rejuvenation |
| Intensity | Adjustable professional settings |
| Control Interface | Digital touchscreen |
| Power Supply | USB or AC power configuration |
| Included Accessories | Two accessory racks and foot switch |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and overload protection |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and technical assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main cold plasma system, two treatment handles, 10 probes and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Cold Fusional Plasma Machine
-
Two multifunctional plasma handles
-
Plasma Spray Head
-
Square Tube Head
-
Flared Tube Head
-
Small Roller Needle
-
Large Roller Needle
-
44P Pin Head
-
Ozone Plasma Head
-
Diamond-Shaped Head
-
Curved Needle Head
-
Straight Needle Head
-
Two accessory racks
-
Foot switch
-
Power cable
-
USB power components where applicable
-
English user manual
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Handle and probe installation
-
Probe-selection guidance
-
Intensity-adjustment instructions
-
Professional treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication guidance
-
Cleaning and infection-control instructions
-
Routine maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Handle installation
-
Operation of all 10 probes
-
Probe selection
-
Treatment-area planning
-
Intensity adjustment
-
Client consultation
-
Scar and texture protocols
-
Acne-prone skin programs
-
Cleaning and infection control
-
Routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital touchscreen
-
Plasma-generation components
-
Original treatment handles
-
Foot-switch components
-
Handle and accessory connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect probe installation or operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of probes, needles and consumables
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional plasma equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Active herpes simplex
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe inflammatory skin conditions
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent laser treatments, chemical peels or aggressive exfoliation
-
Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Poor wound healing
-
A history of abnormal or keloid scarring
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Needle and roller probes require appropriate hygiene, disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use components must not be reused.
Possible treatment responses may include redness, warmth, dryness, temporary irritation, swelling or sensitivity.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Dermatology clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Advanced skin-care studios
-
Anti-aging specialists
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Trained plasma practitioners
-
Qualified healthcare professionals
-
Professional beauty centers
-
Businesses expanding their advanced skin services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Cold Fusional Plasma Machine?
Access Ten Professional Probes
The system includes 10 interchangeable probes for surface, broad-area, localized, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments.
Customize Every Treatment
Different probe shapes and adjustable intensity settings allow practitioners to create area-specific professional protocols.
Treat Multiple Skin Concerns
The system supports professional programs for fine lines, acne-scar appearance, suitable surgical scars, dull-looking skin and uneven texture.
Improve Professional Workflow
Two handles, foot-switch operation, a digital touchscreen and two accessory racks support organized and efficient treatments.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is cold fusional plasma?
Cold fusional plasma is an ionized-gas technology used in professional skin-care treatments. The system delivers controlled plasma energy through different treatment probes.
What probes are included?
The system includes a Plasma Spray, Square Tube, Flared Tube, Small Roller Needle, Large Roller Needle, 44P Pin Head, Ozone Plasma Head, Diamond-Shaped Head, Curved Needle Head and Straight Needle Head.
Which probe is suitable for acne-scar appearance?
Roller or precision probes may be incorporated into professionally planned acne-scar protocols. Probe selection depends on scar type, skin condition and practitioner assessment.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area. A session covering multiple areas may require additional time.
Can the system be used for fine lines?
Yes. Plasma Spray, Square Tube and Small Roller probes may be incorporated into professional programs for suitable fine-line concerns.
Is the treatment painless?
Client sensation varies according to the probe and intensity. Tingling, warmth, prickling or discomfort may occur.
Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected probe and treatment intensity. Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or swelling may occur.
Can the machine be used on every skin type?
Every client requires professional assessment. Skin type, pigmentation risk, sensitivity, healing history and treatment area must be considered before treatment.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, all 10 probes, intensity selection, treatment protocols, infection control, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Advanced Cold Plasma Treatments to Your Business
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine combines:
-
Professional cold plasma technology
-
Ten interchangeable treatment probes
-
Two multifunctional handles
-
Portable touchscreen and foot-switch operation
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its probe options, package contents and professional training.
Order Your Cold Fusional Plasma Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Fibroblast Plasma Pen System
Precision Plasma Technology for Skin Tightening and Rejuvenation
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is a professional aesthetic device developed for beauty clinics, medical spas, professional skin-care studios and qualified aesthetic practitioners.
The pen produces a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This creates a localized thermal effect that supports professional skin-tightening, texture-refinement and rejuvenation protocols.
Its compact pen design allows trained practitioners to work precisely on selected facial and body areas according to the client’s skin condition and professional treatment plan.
Precision plasma arc | Targeted skin treatments | Professional operation | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Plasma Platform
Fine-Line and Wrinkle Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports professionally planned treatments for the appearance of suitable facial lines and wrinkles.
Common applications include:
-
Forehead-line appearance
-
Suitable eye-area lines
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Upper-lip lines
-
Lower-face lines
-
General anti-aging protocols
Skin-Tightening Programs
The controlled plasma arc creates localized thermal effects on selected skin areas.
Common applications include:
-
Loose-looking facial skin
-
Jawline skin tightening
-
Suitable neck areas
-
Forehead treatments
-
Lower-face rejuvenation
-
Professional firming programs
Scar and Texture Refinement
The plasma pen can be incorporated into professional protocols intended to improve the appearance of selected scars and uneven-looking texture.
Common applications include:
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Localized skin imperfections
-
Surface texture refinement
-
Professional skin-renewal treatments
Eye-Area Rejuvenation
The precision tip allows trained practitioners to work on appropriate areas surrounding the eyes.
Common applications include:
-
Upper-eye-area skin
-
Lower-eye-area skin
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Fine lines around the eyes
-
Suitable brow-area treatments
-
Professional eye-contour protocols
Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eye, eyeball, wet eyelid margin or other prohibited anatomical structures.
The appropriate intensity, treatment pattern, point spacing and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin type, treatment area and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports customized protocols for different professional aesthetic objectives.
Program 1: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision-focused program for suitable facial lines and small treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Forehead lines
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Upper-lip lines
-
Lower-face wrinkles
Recommended for:
-
Anti-aging clinics
-
Professional skin-care studios
-
Medical spas
-
Clients seeking targeted rejuvenation
Program 2: Facial Skin Tightening
A customized program for suitable areas of loose-looking facial skin.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face tightening
-
Jawline skin
-
Forehead areas
-
Suitable neck areas
Recommended for:
-
Facial-rejuvenation services
-
Professional firming programs
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Clients seeking non-surgical skin treatments
Program 3: Scar-Appearance and Texture Care
A skin-renewal program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture.
Recommended applications:
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Suitable surgical scars
-
Localized texture concerns
-
Selected skin imperfections
Recommended for:
-
Professional scar-care protocols
-
Texture-refinement treatments
-
Skin-renewal programs
-
Appropriately assessed clients
Program 4: Eye-Contour Rejuvenation
A precision program for suitable skin around the eye area.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-eye-area skin
-
Lower-eye-area skin
-
Crow’s-feet appearance
-
Brow-area skin
Recommended for:
-
Eye-contour services
-
Mature-looking eye areas
-
Precision facial treatments
-
Trained professional practitioners
Precision Plasma Application for Customized Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc that produces localized thermal effects at the skin’s surface.
| Treatment Approach | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower-Intensity Application | Small areas, initial protocols and suitable delicate zones |
| Moderate Application | General professional skin-tightening treatments |
| Targeted Point Pattern | Localized wrinkles, scars and texture concerns |
| Customized Treatment Pattern | Area-specific protocols based on professional assessment |
The practitioner must maintain appropriate spacing between plasma points and avoid overtreating the same area.
New clients and sensitive treatment zones should begin with conservative parameters.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The precision pen supports professional treatments on selected facial and body areas.
Facial Treatments
-
Forehead
-
Cheeks
-
Upper-lip area
-
Lower face
-
Jawline
-
Other professionally assessed facial zones
Eye-Contour Treatments
-
Suitable upper-eye-area skin
-
Suitable lower-eye-area skin
-
Crow’s-feet area
-
Brow-area skin
-
Other approved surrounding zones
Neck and Body Treatments
-
Suitable neck areas
-
Décolletage
-
Hands
-
Localized scars
-
Selected texture concerns
-
Other professionally assessed skin areas
Professional Skin-Rejuvenation Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected area, skin type, plasma intensity, application pattern and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Treatment | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Fine-line appearance | Precision plasma pattern | Targeted facial rejuvenation |
| Forehead wrinkles | Customized point application | Wrinkle-appearance improvement |
| Crow’s-feet appearance | Conservative eye-area protocol | Eye-contour rejuvenation |
| Loose-looking facial skin | Skin-tightening pattern | Firming and contour support |
| Jawline skin | Targeted plasma treatment | Lower-face rejuvenation |
| Scar appearance | Localized treatment pattern | Texture-refinement support |
| Uneven-looking texture | Customized plasma application | Skin-renewal program |
| Aging-looking hands | Professional hand protocol | Texture and rejuvenation support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, healing response, tendency toward pigmentation or scarring and contraindications.
2. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the professional protocol. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used where permitted and clinically suitable.
3. Parameter and Pattern Selection
The practitioner selects an appropriate plasma intensity, point spacing, treatment pattern and session duration according to the client’s skin and treatment area.
4. Plasma Treatment
The pen is held at the required distance to create controlled plasma arcs across the selected treatment zone. The practitioner works precisely and avoids excessive overlapping.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is assessed and appropriate aftercare instructions are provided.
A typical session may last approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size and number of treatment areas.
Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points are expected during healing.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The compact Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports precise operation in qualified professional aesthetic settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Controlled plasma-arc technology
-
Precision pen-style applicator
-
Targeted facial and body treatments
-
Adjustable professional parameters
-
Compact and portable design
-
Multiple treatment-tip compatibility
-
Localized treatment control
-
Professional skin-rejuvenation applications
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Fibroblast Plasma Pen |
| Product Type | Professional plasma skin-treatment device |
| Technology | Controlled electrical plasma arc |
| Primary Applications | Skin tightening, fine-line care, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments |
| Treatment Areas | Selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body |
| Treatment Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Operation | Precision point-by-point plasma application |
| Intensity | Adjustable according to the selected device configuration |
| Treatment Tips | Interchangeable professional plasma tips |
| Design | Compact handheld pen |
| Intended Users | Appropriately trained professional operators |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
| Support | Professional operating guidance and technical assistance |
What Is Included?
The package includes the plasma pen and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Fibroblast Plasma Pen
-
Professional plasma treatment tips
-
Tip-installation components
-
Power adapter or charging equipment for the selected model
-
Power cable where applicable
-
Protective storage packaging
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Professional setup guidance
-
Treatment-tip installation
-
Intensity-selection guidance
-
Treatment-pattern guidance
-
Point-spacing instructions
-
Facial and body treatment guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional operating guidance covers:
-
Device setup
-
Treatment-tip installation
-
Intensity selection
-
Plasma-arc control
-
Treatment-point spacing
-
Facial-area mapping
-
Eye-contour precautions
-
Skin-type assessment
-
Client consultation
-
Contraindication screening
-
Post-treatment care
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
The operator must also meet all professional training, qualification and licensing requirements applicable in the intended market.
Three-Year Warranty
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main plasma pen unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Plasma-generation components
-
Intensity-control system
-
Original charging or power components
-
Other eligible components supplied with the device
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Setup guidance for eligible replacement components
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-tip installation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or power connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of treatment tips and consumables
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, device serial information, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen intentionally creates controlled thermal injury at the skin’s surface. It is a professional treatment device and should only be operated by appropriately trained and legally authorized practitioners.
A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Active herpes simplex
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe inflammatory skin conditions
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent laser treatments or chemical peels
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Poor wound healing
-
A history of abnormal or keloid scarring
-
Higher risk of post-inflammatory pigmentation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Possible treatment responses and complications include:
-
Redness
-
Swelling
-
Tenderness
-
Crusting
-
Temporary treatment marks
-
Pigmentation changes
-
Infection
-
Delayed healing
-
Burns
-
Scarring
Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eyes, wet eyelid margin, mucous membranes or other prohibited anatomical areas.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Professional aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Qualified skin-care studios
-
Trained plasma practitioners
-
Appropriate healthcare professionals
-
Professional anti-aging centers
-
Clinics offering targeted skin treatments
-
Businesses expanding their advanced aesthetic services
This device is not intended for casual, untrained or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose the Fibroblast Plasma Pen?
Provide Precision Treatments
The compact pen and controlled plasma arc allow trained practitioners to work on localized wrinkles, scars and skin-texture concerns.
Treat Multiple Skin Areas
The system supports professional protocols for selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity, treatment-point spacing and application patterns allow treatments to be adapted to the client’s skin and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The device can support professional fine-line, skin-tightening, scar-appearance, eye-contour and texture-refinement services.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year limited warranty, professional operating guidance and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is a Fibroblast Plasma Pen?
A Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This produces localized thermal effects used in professional aesthetic skin treatments.
How does plasma treatment support skin tightening?
The controlled thermal treatment creates localized skin contraction and initiates a healing response. The appearance of the treated area may continue changing during recovery and remodeling.
Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the forehead, cheeks, upper-lip area, eye contour, lower face, jawline, neck, hands and selected scars.
How long does a session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. The exact duration depends on the size and number of treatment areas.
Is plasma pen treatment painless?
No. The procedure can cause heat, stinging or discomfort. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used by a qualified professional where permitted.
Is there downtime?
Yes. Redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points may occur. Recovery time varies according to treatment intensity, area and individual healing response.
When may clients notice results?
Some contraction may be visible after treatment, while additional changes may develop during healing. Outcomes and timelines vary between clients.
Are results permanent?
No permanent result should be guaranteed. The natural aging process continues, and maintenance or additional treatment may be required.
Can the device be used on every skin type?
No. Some skin types have a higher risk of pigmentation changes or scarring. Every client requires careful professional skin assessment before treatment.
Can the Plasma Pen be used at home?
No. Plasma treatment creates controlled thermal injury and should only be performed by an appropriately trained and legally authorized professional.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved device components, subject to the official warranty policy. Treatment tips, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Add Precision Plasma Treatments to Your Professional Services
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen combines:
-
Controlled plasma-arc technology
-
Precision point-by-point application
-
Professional facial and body protocols
-
Targeted skin-tightening and texture-refinement services
-
Three-year limited warranty and technical support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the Fibroblast Plasma Pen or receive more information about its professional operation and package contents.
Order Your Fibroblast Plasma Pen and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$1,299.00
Professional Three-in-One Pressotherapy System
Far-Infrared Heat, Pneumatic Compression and EMS Muscle Stimulation
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine is a multifunctional wellness platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, wellness clinics, postpartum recovery centers and sports-recovery studios.
The system combines far-infrared heat, pneumatic air-pressure massage and electrical muscle stimulation. Its full-body compression suit contains 20 air chambers for controlled sequential pressure across multiple body areas.
Four operating modes and independent temperature and pressure controls allow trained operators to customize treatments according to the client’s comfort and professional wellness objectives.
Three treatment technologies | Twenty air chambers | Four operating modes | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Pressotherapy Platform
Far-Infrared Heat
The far-infrared function provides adjustable warmth across suitable areas covered by the treatment suit.
Common applications include:
-
General body warming
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Circulation-focused wellness
-
Body-care programs
-
Relaxation treatments
-
Recovery-oriented sessions
Pneumatic Compression Massage
Twenty air chambers inflate and deflate in programmed sequences to provide controlled compression across the body.
Common applications include:
-
Lymphatic-drainage support
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Temporary water-retention support
-
General circulation-focused wellness
-
Full-body relaxation
-
Recovery-oriented treatments
EMS Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function applies controlled electrical impulses to suitable muscle groups.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle-stimulation programs
-
General muscle conditioning
-
Body-toning support
-
Post-workout wellness
-
Fitness-oriented services
-
Customized recovery protocols
Independent Zone Control
Temperature and pressure can be adjusted independently for different body zones.
Common operating applications include:
-
Customized upper-body pressure
-
Customized lower-body pressure
-
Independent temperature adjustment
-
Client-comfort management
-
Targeted wellness programs
-
Personalized treatment sequences
The appropriate operating mode, pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and session duration should be selected according to the client’s condition, tolerance and professional protocol.
Select the Right Operating Mode for Each Client
The system provides four customizable operating modes. The appropriate mode should be selected following consultation and contraindication assessment.
Mode A: Gentle Relaxation
A lower-intensity program designed for comfort-focused and first-time treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
General relaxation
-
Light compression massage
-
First-time sessions
-
Gentle body-wellness programs
Recommended for:
-
New clients
-
Fatigued professionals
-
Relaxation-focused spa clients
-
Clients who prefer gentle pressure
Mode B: Lymphatic-Drainage Support
A sequential compression program for professionally planned fluid-movement and circulation-focused treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Temporary water-retention support
-
General lymphatic wellness
-
Full-body compression massage
Recommended for:
-
Wellness-center clients
-
Beauty-spa programs
-
Suitable recovery services
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Mode C: Body-Conditioning Support
A moderate-intensity program combining compression, heat and suitable EMS settings.
Recommended applications:
-
Body-toning support
-
General muscle stimulation
-
Circulation-focused body care
-
Wellness and fitness programs
Recommended for:
-
Weight-management clients
-
Fitness and wellness centers
-
Body-care packages
-
Professionally assessed users
Mode D: Recovery Program
A customizable program designed for appropriately selected athletic and muscle-recovery applications.
Recommended applications:
-
Post-workout wellness
-
Tired-muscle relaxation
-
Lower-body recovery
-
General fatigue-relief programs
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Sports-recovery studios
-
Fitness facilities
-
Active-lifestyle clients
Twenty Air Chambers for Customized Compression
The full-body pressotherapy suit contains 20 air chambers that inflate and deflate according to the selected mode.
| Compression Zone | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Legs | Tired-leg and recovery-focused treatments |
| Thighs | Lower-body compression and circulation support |
| Waist and Abdomen | Appropriately selected body-wellness programs |
| Arms and Upper Body | General compression and relaxation |
| Full Body | Comprehensive professional pressotherapy sessions |
Independent zone control gives trained operators greater flexibility over pressure, temperature and treatment coverage.
New clients should begin with gentler pressure, lower temperature and reduced EMS intensity before the settings are increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The full-body suit supports professional treatment of multiple body zones.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Arms
-
Upper back
-
Waist
-
Suitable torso areas
-
Other professionally assessed zones
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Thighs
-
Lower legs
-
Calves
-
Feet
-
Gluteal areas
-
Suitable lower-body zones
Full-Body Programs
-
General relaxation
-
Lymphatic-drainage support
-
Muscle-stimulation programs
-
Recovery-oriented sessions
-
Body-care treatments
-
Wellness-maintenance programs
Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected operating mode, pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and professional protocol.
| Client Objective | Applicable Technology | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| General relaxation | Infrared and pneumatic compression | Full-body comfort and relaxation |
| Tired legs | Pneumatic compression | Lower-body recovery support |
| Temporary water retention | Sequential compression | Fluid-movement support |
| Muscle conditioning | EMS | Controlled muscle stimulation |
| Post-workout recovery | Compression, heat and EMS | Athletic wellness support |
| Body-care programs | Three-in-one treatment | General contour and wellness support |
| Postpartum wellness | Gentle customized program | Professionally cleared recovery support |
| Fatigue relief | Heat and compression | Relaxation and body comfort |
Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, treatment objectives, current condition and contraindications. The appropriate operating mode and treatment zones are then selected.
2. Suit Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the full-body suit is fitted correctly. Air hoses, EMS connections and temperature-control components are connected according to the operating manual.
3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects Mode A, B, C or D and adjusts the pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and session duration according to the client’s comfort.
4. Three-in-One Treatment
The system delivers controlled far-infrared warmth, sequential pneumatic compression and EMS stimulation according to the selected program. A typical session lasts approximately 30–45 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the suit is removed and the client receives appropriate hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary warmth, pressure marks, increased urination, tingling, muscle fatigue or mild soreness may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines three wellness technologies with intelligent touchscreen controls for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Far-infrared heat
-
Pneumatic compression massage
-
EMS muscle stimulation
-
Full-body suit with 20 air chambers
-
Four operating modes
-
Independent zone control
-
Adjustable temperature and pressure
-
Professional touchscreen interface
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional pressotherapy system |
| Primary Technologies | Far-infrared heat, pneumatic compression and EMS |
| Pressotherapy Suit | Full-body compression suit |
| Air Chambers | 20 |
| Operating Modes | Four modes: A, B, C and D |
| Zone Control | Independent temperature and pressure settings |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–45 minutes |
| Maximum Power | 350W |
| Voltage Options | 100–110V and 220–240V |
| Electrical Frequency | 50Hz and 60Hz |
| Control Interface | Professional touchscreen |
| Suit Material | Soft, breathable treatment material |
| Safety Features | Automatic deflation, overheat protection and pressure regulation |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and technical assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main pressotherapy unit, full-body treatment suit and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 3-in-1 Pressotherapy control system
-
One full-body 20-air-chamber suit
-
Pneumatic air hoses
-
EMS connection components
-
Temperature-control components
-
Suit connectors and accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Suit-fitting instructions
-
Air-hose connection guidance
-
Mode-selection guidance
-
Pressure and temperature adjustment
-
EMS-intensity guidance
-
Independent zone-control training
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Full-body suit fitting
-
Air-hose installation
-
EMS connection and placement
-
Operation of Modes A–D
-
Pressure adjustment
-
Temperature adjustment
-
Independent zone control
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Internal air compressor
-
Temperature-control components
-
EMS control components
-
Original air hoses and connectors
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect suit or connector operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of the suit, EMS pads and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional pressotherapy and EMS equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Deep-vein thrombosis
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe varicose veins
-
Unexplained edema
-
Acute inflammation or fever
-
Active cancer
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Recent surgery
-
Severe heat sensitivity
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Postpartum clients require appropriate medical clearance before treatment. Abdominal pressure, infrared heat and EMS settings must be selected carefully according to recovery status.
The selected pressure, temperature and EMS intensity must remain comfortable throughout treatment.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Wellness clinics
-
Postpartum recovery centers
-
Sports-recovery studios
-
Fitness facilities
-
Professional massage providers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Three-in-One Pressotherapy Machine?
Combine Three Wellness Technologies
The system combines far-infrared heat, pneumatic compression and EMS muscle stimulation in one professional platform.
Provide Full-Body Coverage
The treatment suit includes 20 air chambers for controlled compression across multiple upper- and lower-body zones.
Customize Every Session
Four operating modes and independent zone controls allow pressure, temperature and EMS intensity to be adapted to the client’s comfort.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, lymphatic-drainage, muscle-stimulation, body-care and recovery-oriented programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does the three-in-one system work?
The machine combines adjustable far-infrared warmth, sequential pneumatic compression and EMS muscle stimulation in one treatment platform.
What do the 20 air chambers provide?
The chambers inflate and deflate in programmed sequences to deliver controlled compression across multiple body areas.
What is the difference between Modes A, B, C and D?
The four modes provide different pressure sequences and intensity patterns. Operators select the appropriate mode according to client comfort and treatment objectives.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30–45 minutes. The exact duration depends on the selected mode and customized settings.
Can temperature and pressure be adjusted separately?
Yes. Independent zone controls allow trained operators to customize pressure and temperature for different body areas.
Can postpartum clients receive treatment?
Postpartum treatment requires appropriate medical clearance. The recovery stage, delivery type and current health must be considered before applying compression, heat or EMS.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Pressure, heat and EMS intensity are adjustable. The treatment should remain comfortable, and the operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary warmth, pressure marks, tingling, increased urination or mild muscle fatigue may occur.
Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, suit fitting, operating modes, pressure, temperature, EMS settings, zone control, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Three-in-One Pressotherapy to Your Business
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine combines:
-
Far-infrared heat therapy
-
Twenty-chamber pneumatic compression
-
EMS muscle stimulation
-
Four customizable operating modes
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its operating modes, full-body suit and professional training.
Order Your 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
Elevate Your Practice
Shop by Treatment
Explore professional-grade machines crafted for every aesthetic and wellness need.
Top Sellers You Can't Miss
$999.00
Receives in 8 days.
$1,199.00
Receives in 8 days.
$1,129.00
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Receives in 8 days.
$1,299.00
Receives in 8 days.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Alegerea unei selecții duce la o reîmprospătare completă a paginii.
- Se deschide într-o fereastră nouă.